Advanced User Guide E CT2-D096-B © CANON INC.
Contents Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Instruction Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Quick Start Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M: Manual Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 B: Long (Bulb) Exposures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shooting with the Touch Shutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Image Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 High-Speed Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Metering Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Exposure Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Movie Servo AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Touch & Drag AF Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Manual Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Servo AF Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the Main Dial and Quick Control Dial 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Rate Button Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Customizing Playback Information Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 Displaying the Highlight Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 AF Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Tab Menus: Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 Folder Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 File Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Functions/My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Tab Menus: Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Custom Function Setting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 Tab Menus: My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Registering My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction Before starting to shoot, be sure to read the following To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions. Also read this Advanced User Guide carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly. Take some test shots, and understand about product liability After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded.
Package Contents Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your dealer. Camera (with body cap) Battery Pack LP-E6NH (with protective cover) Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E* Strap * Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.) The camera does not come with a memory card ( ), interface cable, or HDMI cable. If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Caution When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon website ( ). The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually. Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
Instruction Manuals The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions. Advanced User Guide Complete instructions are provided in this Advanced User Guide. For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website. https://cam.start.canon/C004/ Lens/Software Instruction Manual Download from the following website. https://cam.start.canon/ Note Select [ : Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.
Quick Start Guide 1. Insert the battery ( ). Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using ( 2. Insert the card ( ). ). You can insert two cards. 3. Attach the lens ( ). Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera to attach the lens.
4. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < 5. Set the power switch to < 6. Flip out the screen ( >( >( ). ). ). When the date/time/zone setting screen is displayed, see Date/Time/ Zone.
7. Set the Mode dial to < >( ). All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically. 8. Focus on the subject ( ). An AF point [ ] appears over any face detected. Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject. 9. Take the picture ( ). Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
10. Review the picture. The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen. To display the image again, press the < > button ( ).
About This Guide Icons in This Guide Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos Icons in This Guide > < < > < > Indicates the Main dial. Indicates Quick control dial 1. Indicates Quick control dial 2. Indicates the Multi-controller. < > < > Indicates the lens control ring. < > Indicates the Set button. * Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button you pressed, as timed after you release the button.
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to < > and the Multi-function lock feature is off ( , ). It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults. Screen shots in this guide show the default menu settings for NTSC regions (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.) as an example. Default menu settings for Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc. will be for PAL.
Compatible Cards The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera ( ). SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported. Cards That Can Record Movies When recording movies, use a card with ample performance (fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording quality ( ).
Safety Instructions Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely. Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others. WARNING: Denotes the risk of serious injury or death. Keep the product out of the reach of young children. A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation. The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger. • Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth. • Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands. • Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet. • Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects. Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
CAUTION: Follow the cautions below. Otherwise physical injury or property damage may result. Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes. Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time. This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use. Flash emits high temperatures when fired.
Handling Precautions Camera care This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly. The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
Lens After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts (1).
Smudges on the image sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a nearest Canon Service Center. Battery Tips for using the battery and charger Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. When storing the battery for extended periods, charge it about once a year. When charging the battery, aim to charge it to approx.
Part Names Attaching the Strap (1) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (19) (20) (21) (8) (22) (9) (23) (10) (11) (24) (12) (13) 27
(1) Mode dial (2) < (3) < > Multi-function lock button > Main dial (4) < (5) Shutter button > Multi-function button (6) Movie shooting button (7) Self-timer lamp/AF-assist beam (8) Remote control sensor (9) Grip (battery compartment) (10) DC coupler cord hole (11) Depth-of-field preview button (12) Contacts (13) Lens mount (14) Flash sync contacts (15) Hot shoe (16) RF lens mount index (17) Power switch (18) Strap mount (19) < (20) Microphone (21) Image sensor (22
(1) (2) (3) (5) (6) (4) (7) (8) (16) (9) (17) (18) (19) (20) (10) (1) Eyecup (2) Viewfinder eyepiece (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (3) < (4) Terminal cover > Menu button (5) < (6) < (7) < > Multi-controller (can also be pressed straight in) (8) < > Magnify/Reduce button (9) < > Quick Control button (10) Access lamp (11) < (12) < (13) < (14) Viewfinder sensor (15) < > Rating button (16) < > External microphone IN terminal (17) < > Digital terminal (18) < > Headp
(1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (2) (3) (4) (14) (5) (15) (6) (16) (1) Dioptric adjustment knob (2) Accessory positioning hole (3) Screen (4) Tripod socket (5) Serial number (body number) (6) < (7) Speaker (8) < > AE lock button (9) < > AF point selection button (10) Strap mount (11) Card slot cover (12) Card slot 2 (13) Card slot 1 (14) Battery compartment cover lock (15) Battery compartment cover (16) < > Erase button > Quick control dial 1 30 (12) (13)
Mode dial You can set the shooting mode. (2) (1) (4) (3) (1) < > mode All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject or scene for shooting.
Battery Charger LC-E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 ( ).
Battery Charger LC-E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 ( (1) Charge lamp (2) Battery pack slot (3) Power cord (4) Power cord socket 33 ).
Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the strap mount from the bottom, then pass it through the strap buckle as shown. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.
Software Software Overview Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other Dedicated Software Downloading the Software Instruction Manual Software Overview This section summarizes software used with EOS cameras. Note that downloading and installing the software requires an internet connection. The software cannot be downloaded or installed in environments without an internet connection.
Downloading and Installing EOS Software or Other Dedicated Software Always install the latest version of the software. Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the latest version. Caution Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The software will not be installed correctly. The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to the internet. Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly.
1. Download the software. Connect to the internet from a computer and access the following Canon website. https://cam.start.canon/ Select your country or region of residence and download the software. Depending on the software, you may need to enter the camera's serial number. The serial number is on the bottom of the camera. Decompress it on the computer. For Windows Click the displayed installer file to start the installer. For macOS A dmg file will be created and displayed.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manual Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to your computer, etc. Software Instruction Manual download site https://cam.start.
Preparation and Basic Operations This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.
Charging the Battery 1. Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. 2. Fully insert the battery into the charger. Do the opposite to remove the battery.
3. Recharge the battery. For LC-E6 As shown by the arrow, fl ip out the battery charger’s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet. For LC-E6E Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet. Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet. You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery is charged or not.
Inserting/Removing Batteries Insertion Removal Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6NH (or LP-E6N/LP-E6) in the camera. Insertion 1. Slide the battery compartment cover lock and open the cover. 2. Insert the battery. Insert the end with the electrical contacts. Insert the battery until it locks in place.
3. Close the cover. Press the cover until it snaps shut. Caution You cannot use batteries other than Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6.
Removal 1. Open the cover and remove the battery. Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery. To prevent short-circuits, always attach the included protective cover ( ) to the battery.
Inserting/Removing Cards Insertion Formatting the Card Removal This camera accepts two cards. Recording is possible as long as there is at least one card in the camera. With two cards inserted, you can select one card to record to, or you can record the same image to both cards at once ( ). Caution Make sure the card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable writing and erasing. Insertion 1. Slide the cover to open it.
2. Insert the card. Card 1 Card 2 The card in the rear card slot is [ ], and the one in front of it is [ ]. As shown by the illustration, face the card's label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place. 3. Close the cover. Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut.
4. Set the power switch to < >( ). (2) Card selection icon (3) Card 1 (4) Card 2 Shooting screen ( ) or Quick Control screen ( ) accessed by > button shows which cards are loaded. Cards pressing the < labeled with [ ] are selected for recording. Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera ( ).
Removal 1. Open the cover. Set the power switch to < >. Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover. If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover. 2. Remove the card. Gently push in the card, then let it go to eject. Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. Caution Do not remove cards immediately after a red [ ] icon is displayed as you are shooting. Cards may be hot, due to high internal camera temperature.
Note The number of shots available varies depending on remaining card capacity and settings such as image quality and ISO speed. Setting [ : Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card ( ). Caution When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Using the Screen You can change the direction and angle of the screen. 1. Flip out the screen. 2. Rotate the screen. When the screen is out, you can tilt it up or down or rotate it to face the subject. Indicated angles are only approximate. 3. Face it toward you. Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.
Caution Avoid forcing the screen into position as you rotate it, which puts undue pressure on the hinge. When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of the flipped-out screen will be limited. Note Keep the screen closed and facing the camera body when the camera is not in use. You can protect the screen. A mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen faces subjects in front of the camera.
Turning on the Power Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone Changing the Interface Language Automatic Sensor Cleaning Battery Level Indicator < > The camera turns on. < > The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera. Note If you set the power switch to < > while an image is being recorded to the card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording finishes.
Changing the Interface Language To change the interface language, see Language.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning Whenever the power switch is set to < >, the sensor is cleaned automatically (which may make a faint sound). During the sensor cleaning, the screen will display [ ]. To enable automatic sensor cleaning when the power switch is set to < > as well, you can set this in [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ). If you repeatedly turn the power switch to < > or < > within a short time period, the [ ] icon may not be displayed, but this does not indicate the camera is malfunctioning.
Battery Level Indicator When the power switch is set to < >, the battery level will be indicated. Display Level (%) 100–70 69–50 49–20 19–10 9–1 0 Note Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster: • Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period. • Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture. • Using Image Stabilizer. • Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function. The number of available shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions.
Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses Attaching a Lens Detaching a Lens Caution Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision. When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to < >. If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part. Tips for avoiding smudges and dust When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
Attaching a Lens 1. Remove the caps. Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. 2. Attach the lens. Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place.
3. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >. < > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. For RF lenses without a focus mode switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the : Focus mode]. camera menu, in [ 4. Remove the front lens cap.
Detaching a Lens While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. Attach lens caps to the lens you removed.
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses Attaching a Lens Detaching a Lens All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching an optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses. Attaching a Lens 1. Remove the caps. Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.
2. Attach the lens to the adapter. Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place. (1) Red index (2) White index 3. Attach the adapter to the camera. Align the red mount indexes (3) on the adapter and camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
4. 5. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >. < > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. Remove the front lens cap.
Detaching a Lens 1. While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by the arrow. Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. 2. Detach the lens from the adapter. Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens counterclockwise. Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. Attach lens caps to the lens you removed. Caution For lens precautions, see Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses.
Using the Viewfinder Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or viewfinder ( ). Adjusting the Viewfinder 1. Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. Turn the knob left or right to make the viewfinder display look sharp. Caution The viewfinder and screen cannot be activated at the same time. At some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
Basic Operations Holding the Camera Shutter Button < < < < > Main Dial > Quick Control Dial 1 > Quick Control Dial 2 > Multi-Controller < >: Multi-Function Button < >: AF Start Button < >: Multi-Function Lock Button < < > Control Ring >: Info Button 66
Holding the Camera Viewing the screen as you shoot As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see Using the Screen. (1) Normal angle (2) Low angle (3) High angle Shooting through the viewfinder To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake. (1) Horizontal shooting (2) Vertical shooting 1.With your right hand, hold the camera firmly by the camera grip. 2.With your left hand, support the lens from below. 3.
Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture value. The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed on the screen or in the viewfinder for 8 sec. (metering timer/ ). Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture.
Note The camera will still pause before taking a picture if you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and immediately press it completely. Even during menu display or image playback, you can return to shooting standby by pressing the shutter button halfway.
< > Main Dial (1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial. Press a button such as < >, then turn the < > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby. Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white balance, and flash exposure compensation. (2) Turn only the < > dial. While looking at the screen or viewfinder, turn the < > dial. Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture value, etc.
< > Quick Control Dial 1 (1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial. Press a button such as < >, then turn the < > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby. Used for operations such as selecting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white balance, and flash exposure compensation. (2) Turn only the < > dial. While looking at the screen or viewfinder, turn the < > dial.
< > Quick Control Dial 2 (1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial. Press a button such as < >, then turn the < > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby. Used for operations such as switching between main tabs on the menu screen. (2) Turn only the < > dial. While looking at the screen or viewfinder, turn the < > dial. Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed.
< > Multi-Controller < > is an eight-direction key with center button. To use it, press lightly with the tip of your thumb. Used for operations such as white balance correction, AF point/magnifying frame movement in still photo shooting or movie recording, magnifying frame movement during playback, or Quick Control settings. Can also be used to select or set menu items.
< >: Multi-Function Button By pressing the < > button and turning the < > dial, you can set the ISO speed ( ), drive mode ( ), AF operation ( ), white balance ( ), and flash exposure compensation ( ). To select the AF area or AF method, press the < > button ( ), then press the < > button.
< >: AF Start Button Equivalent to pressing the shutter button halfway (except in < 75 > mode).
< >: Multi-Function Lock Button With [ : Multi function lock] configured ( ), you can press the < > button to prevent settings from being changed by accidentally touching the Main dial, Quick Control dials, Multi-controller, control ring, or touch-screen panel. Press the < > button again to unlock the controls.
< > Control Ring By default, exposure compensation can be set by turning the control ring of RF lenses or mount adapters while pressing the shutter button halfway in < >, < >, < >, < >, or < > mode. Otherwise, you can assign a different function to the control ring by customizing operations in [ : Customize dials] ( ).
< >: Info Button Each press of the < > button changes the information shown. The following sample screens are for still photos.
Menu Operations and Settings Menu Screen in < > Mode Menu Screen in < >/< >/< >/< >/< Menu Setting Procedure Dimmed Menu Items (1) < (2) < > button > button (3) < (4) Screen (5) < > Quick control dial 1 (6) < > button (7) < > Quick control dial 2 (8) < > Main dial > button 79 >/< > Mode
Menu Screen in < In < > Mode > mode, some tabs and menu items do not appear.
Menu Screen in < Mode (1) Main tabs (2) Secondary tabs (3) Menu items (4) : Autofocus (6) : Playback (7) >/< : Wireless features : Set-up (9) : Custom Functions (10) : My Menu (11) >/< : Shooting (5) (8) >/< Menu settings 81 >/< >/< >
Menu Setting Procedure 1. Display the menu screen. Press the < 2. > button to display the menu screen. Select a tab. Each time you turn the < > dial, the main tab (group of functions) will switch. You can also switch tabs by pressing the < > button. Turn the < 3. > dial to select a secondary tab. Select an item. Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press < 82 >.
4. Select an option. Turn the < > dial to select an option. The current setting is indicated in blue. 5. Set an option. Press < 6. > to set it. Exit the setting. Press the < > button to return to shooting standby. Note The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the < > button to display the menu screen. Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen or using < >. To cancel the operation, press the < > button.
Dimmed Menu Items Example: When Highlight tone priority has been set Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it. You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing >. < If you cancel the overriding function's setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable. Caution You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu items.
Quick Control You can directly and intuitively select and set the settings displayed. 1. Press the < 2. Select a setting item and set your preferred option. > button ( ). To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down. To adjust the setting, turn the < > or < > dial, or press < left or right. Some items are set by pressing a button after this. > Press < > vertically or horizontally to select an item on the screen shown above.
Touch-Screen Operation Tapping Dragging Tapping Sample screen (Quick Control) Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen. For example, when you tap [ ], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [ you can return to the preceding screen. Note To have the camera beep for touch operations, set [ : Beep] to [Enable] ( ). Responsiveness to touch operations can be adjusted in [ : Touch control] ( ).
Dragging Sample screen (Menu screen) Slide your finger while touching the screen.
Shooting Mode This chapter describes shooting modes.
A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) < > is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject ( ). 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Aim the camera at what you will shoot (the subject). >. An AF point may be displayed on the subject, under some shooting conditions.
3. Focus on the subject. Press the shutter button halfway to focus. You can also focus by tapping a person's face or another subject on the screen (Touch AF) when [ : Continuous AF] is set to [Disable]. Under low light, the AF-assist beam ( needed. ) is automatically activated if For stationary subjects, the AF point is displayed in green when the subject is in focus, and the camera beeps. (One-Shot AF) For moving subjects, the AF point is displayed in blue and tracks subject movement.
Note AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF operation cannot be switched during shooting. The < > mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you prefer other color tones, set the shooting mode to < >, < >, < >, < >, or < > ( ) and select a Picture Style other than [ ] before shooting ( ).
Minimizing blurred photos Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment. Mount the camera securely on the tripod. Using a remote switch (sold separately, ) or a wireless remote control (sold separately, ) is recommended. FAQ Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point). Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway ( ). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again.
A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) Recomposing the Shot Shooting Moving Subjects Scene Icons Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject.
Shooting Moving Subjects After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
Scene Icons The camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated in the upper left of the screen. For icon details, see Scene Icons.
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed manually or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure compensation. Shooting in < > mode, with control over each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting in < >, < >, < >, or < > mode. *< > stands for Flexible value. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed. >. Turn the < > dial to select an item to set. [ of the selected item.
3. Set the amount of exposure compensation. Turn the < > dial and select the exposure level indicator. [ appears to the left of the exposure level indicator. Turn the < > dial to set the option. To reset the setting to [±0], press the < Combinations of functions in < Shutter Speed Aperture Value [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection Manual selection Manual selection ] > button.
Note Values for shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are underlined. You can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure compensation amount to [±0] in step 2 or 3 by holding down the < > button.
P: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness. * < > stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Focus on the subject. >. Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green (with One-Shot AF). The shutter speed and aperture value are set automatically. 3. Check the display.
Caution If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest aperture value blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash. If the “1/8000” shutter speed and the highest aperture value blink, it indicates overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens. Note Differences between < > and < > modes In < > mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots.
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion. *< > stands for Time value. Blurred motion (Slow speed: 1/30 sec.) Frozen motion (Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.) 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2.
3. Focus on the subject. Press the shutter button halfway. The aperture value is set automatically. 4. Check the display and shoot. As long as the aperture value is not blinking, the standard exposure will be obtained. Caution If the lowest aperture value blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the < > dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed. If the highest aperture value blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Av: Aperture-Priority AE Depth-of-Field Preview In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. A higher f/ number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
3. Focus on the subject. Press the shutter button halfway. The shutter speed is set automatically. 4. Check the display and shoot. As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, the standard exposure will be obtained. Caution If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the < > dial to decrease the aperture value (open the aperture) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed. If the “1/8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Depth-of-Field Preview Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture value setting and check the area in focus (depth of field). Note The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground to the background. The depth-of-field effect is readily apparent on images as you change the aperture value and press the depth-of-field preview button. Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
M: Manual Exposure Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure meter. *< > stands for Manual. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Set the ISO speed ( Turn the < >. ). > dial to set it. With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation ( 3. ). Set the shutter speed and aperture value. To set the shutter speed, turn the < > dial.
4. Focus on the subject. Press the shutter button halfway. Check the exposure level mark [ ] to see how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level. (1) Standard exposure index (2) Exposure level mark 5. Set the exposure and take the picture. Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed and aperture value.
Note ISO speed is locked when you hold down the shutter button halfway after subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF in < > mode with ISO Auto, < > (Evaluative metering), and [ : AE lock meter. mode after focus] set to the default setting ( ). When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed. If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the < > button was pressed.
B: Long (Bulb) Exposures Bulb Timer In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, astrophotography, and other subjects requiring long exposures. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Set the desired aperture value. Turn the < 3. >. > dial to set it. Take the picture. The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button pressed completely.
Caution Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual. ISO 400 is used when the camera is set to ISO Auto. When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb exposure time).
2. Select [Enable]. Select [Enable], then press the < 3. > button. Set the exposure time. Select an option (hours : minutes : seconds). Press < > to display [ ]. Set a value, then press < 4. Select [OK]. 111 >. (Returns to [ ].
5. Take the picture. After you press the shutter button completely, the bulb exposure continues for your specified time. [ ] and the exposure time are displayed on the screen during bulb timer shooting. To clear the timer setting, select [Disable] in step 2. Caution Bulb exposure stops if you press the shutter button completely and release it during the timer.
Shooting and Recording This chapter describes shooting and recording and introduces menu settings on the shooting ([ ]) tab.
Still Photo Shooting < to the right of titles indicates functions only available in < >, or < > mode.
• Shooting Information Display • Viewfinder Display Format • Display Performance • Metering Mode Selection • Manual Exposure Compensation • Exposure Lock (AE Lock) • General Still Photo Shooting 115
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting Shooting 1 (1) Image quality (2) Cropping/aspect ratio Shooting 2 (1) Expo.comp./AEB (2) ISO speed settings (3) HDR PQ settings (4) Auto Lighting Optimizer (5) Highlight tone priority (6) Anti-flicker shoot.
Shooting 3 (1) White balance (2) Custom White Balance (3) WB Shift/Bkt. (4) Color space (5) Picture Style • Picture Style Selection • Picture Style Customization • Picture Style Registration (6) Clarity (7) Lens aberration correction Shooting 4 (1) Long exp.
Shooting 5 (1) Multiple exposure (2) HDR Mode (3) Focus bracketing Shooting 6 (1) Interval timer (2) Bulb timer (3) Shutter mode (4) Release shutter without card 118
Shooting 7 (1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode (2) Touch Shutter (3) Image review (4) High speed display (5) Metering timer (6) Expo. simulation (7) Shooting info. disp. Shooting 8 (1) VF display format (2) Disp.
Shooting 9 (1) Movie rec quality (2) Sound recording (3) ISO speed settings (4) Auto slow shutter (5) Shutter btn function for movies In < > mode, the following screens are displayed.
Shooting 2 (1) Interval timer (2) Release shutter without card Shooting 3 (1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode (2) Touch Shutter (3) Image review (4) Shooting info. disp. (5) VF display format (6) Disp.
Shooting 4 (1) Movie rec quality (2) Sound recording (3) Shutter btn function for movies 122
Image Quality RAW Images Guide to Image Quality Settings Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG/HEIF image quality options are as follows: / / / / / / . For RAW images, you can specify or as the image quality. 1. Select [ : Image quality]. The screen displayed varies depending on [ in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.]. 123 Record func.
2. Set the image quality. Standard/Auto switch card/Record to multiple For RAW images, turn the < < > dial. Press < > to set it. > dial, and for JPEG images, turn the Record separately When [ Record func.] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.] is set > dial to select [ ] or [ ], then to [Rec. separately], turn the < press < >. Note that recording separately to and is not available for RAW images. Select an image quality on the screen displayed, then press < 124 >.
Note HEIF can be specified when [HDR shooting ] in [ : HDR PQ settings] is set to [Enable]. You can convert these images to JPEG images after shooting ( ). is set if you set both RAW and JPEG/HEIF to [ ]. Two versions of each shot are recorded at your specified image quality when you have selected both RAW and JPEG/HEIF. Both images have the same file number but each has a different file extension, with .JPG for JPEG, .HIF for HEIF and .CR3 for RAW. is in (Fine) quality.
RAW Images RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the card digitally as or , based on your selection. produces RAW images with smaller file sizes than . RAW images can be processed using [ : RAW image processing] ( ) to save them as JPEG or HEIF images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of JPEG or HEIF images with various processing conditions. You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.
Guide to Image Quality Settings See Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting for details on file size, number of shots available, maximum burst, and other estimated values.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the upper left of the shooting screen and lower right of the viewfinder. Note If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99 or more shots continuously. Fewer shots are available for a value of 98 or lower, and when [BUSY] is displayed on the screen, internal memory is full and shooting will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase.
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size of approx. 35.9×23.9 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting, you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6× (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio as needed before shooting. EF-S lenses capture a 3:2 area in the center, magnified approx. 1.6× (APS-C size). 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Cropping/aspect ratio].
3. Select how the shooting area is displayed. On the screen in step 2, press the < Select the type of display, then press < > button. >. Caution / / / image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses. Shooting with [1.6x (crop)] and image quality set to / / produces / / / images, respectively. / Shooting with an EF-S lens when [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set automatically clears the setting and shoots with [1.
4. Take the picture.
When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S lens is used, an image magnified approx. 1.6× is displayed. When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured. Caution Areas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses. [Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) In exposure bracketing, three consecutive images are captured at different exposures within your specified range of up to ±3 stops (in 1/3-stop increments) by automatically adjusting the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO speed. * AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. 1. Select [ 2. Set the AEB range. : Expo.comp./AEB]. Turn the < > dial to set the AEB range (1). By turning the < dial, you can set the exposure compensation amount. Press < > to set it.
3. Take the picture. Standard exposure Decreased exposure Increased exposure Three bracketed shots are taken, according to the specified drive mode, in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure. AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to turn off the AEB range display. Caution Exposure compensation in AEB may be less effective with [ Optimizer] ( ) set to an option other than [Disable].
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos ISO Speed Range When Set Manually ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In < > mode, ISO speed is set automatically. For details on ISO speed in movie recording, see ISO Speed in Movie Recording. 1. Set the ISO speed. With an image displayed on the screen, set by turning the < > dial.
Note ISO speed can also be set in the ISO speed item by pressing the < > button with an image displayed on the screen. Can also be set on the [ISO speed] screen in [ : ISO speed settings]. To expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H (equivalent to ISO 204800), adjust [ISO speed range] in [ : ISO speed settings] ( ).
ISO Speed Range When Set Manually You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO 50) to ISO 102400, and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H (equivalent to ISO 204800). 1. Select [ 2. Select [ISO speed range]. 3. Set [Minimum]. : ISO speed settings]. Select the [Minimum] box, then press < Select the ISO speed, then press < 137 >. >.
4. Set [Maximum]. Select the [Maximum] box, then press < Select the ISO speed, then press < 5. Select [OK]. 138 >. >.
ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100–102400. The minimum can be set within ISO 100–51200 and the maximum within ISO 200–102400, in 1stop increments. 1. Select [Auto range]. 2. Set [Minimum]. Select the [Minimum] box, then press < Select the ISO speed, then press < 139 >. >.
3. Set [Maximum]. Select the [Maximum] box, then press < Select the ISO speed, then press < 4. >. >. Select [OK]. Note The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift ( ).
Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto To prevent shutter speeds from being set too low automatically, you can set the minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto. This is effective in < > or < > mode when shooting subjects in motion with a wideangle lens, or when using a telephoto lens. It can also reduce camera shake and blurred subjects. 1. Select [Min. shutter spd.].
2. Set the desired minimum shutter speed. Auto If you select [Auto], turn the < > dial to set the difference relative to standard speed (toward Slower or Faster), then press < >. Manual If you select [Manual], turn the < then press < >. > dial to select the shutter speed, Caution If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure.
HDR PQ Settings PQ in HDR PQ refers to the gamma curve of the input signal for displaying HDR images. HDR PQ settings enable the camera to produce HDR images conforming to the PQ specification defined in ITU-R BT.2100 and SMPTE ST.2084. (Actual display depends on monitor performance.) Shots are captured as HEIF or RAW images. * HDR stands for High Dynamic Range. * PQ stands for Perceptual Quantization. 1. Select [ 2. Set [HDR shooting : HDR PQ settings]. ]. Select [Enable].
3. Set [HDR assist disp: shooting]. On the screen, converted images are displayed that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display device. Select [Exposure prior. (mid-tones)] or [Tones prior. (highlights)]. [ ] Exposure prior. (mid-tones) Provides reference display that emphasizes exposure of subjects (such as people) with intermediate brightness. [ ] Tones prior. (highlights) Provides reference display that emphasizes gradation of bright subjects (such as the sky).
4. Set [HDR assist disp: playback]. Converted images are displayed on the screen for playback, giving an impression similar to how they would appear on an HDR display device. Select [Exposure prior. (mid-tones)] or [Tones prior. (highlights)]. [ ] Exposure prior. (mid-tones) Provides reference display that emphasizes exposure of subjects (such as people) with intermediate brightness. [ ] Tones prior. (highlights) Provides reference display that emphasizes gradation of bright subjects (such as the sky).
Caution Expanded ISO speeds (L, H) are not available in HDR shooting. Some scenes may look different from how they appear on an HDR display device. Histograms of images captured with [HDR shooting ] set to [Enable] are not based on images as converted for HDR assist display. Image areas shown in gray in the histogram roughly indicate signal values that are not used. [ : Disp. performance] is not available when [HDR shooting ] is set to [Enable]. It is set to [Smooth].
Auto Lighting Optimizer Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too low or high. In < > mode, [Standard] is set automatically. 1. Select [ 2. Set a correction option. : Auto Lighting Optimizer]. Caution Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting conditions. If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
Note For and images, face lighting can be adjusted in [ : RAW image processing] ( ). To enable [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to be set even in < > and < > modes, press the < > button in step 2 to clear the checkmark [ ] for [Disabled in M or B modes].
Highlight Tone Priority You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights. 1. Select [ 2. Set an option. : Highlight tone priority]. [Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than [Enable], under some shooting conditions. Caution Noise may increase slightly. The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
Anti-Flicker Shooting Uneven exposure and color may result if you shoot at fast shutter speeds under flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights, due to uneven vertical exposure. Anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by flickering. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. 3. Take the picture. : Anti-flicker shoot.].
Caution When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutterrelease time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular. Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
Shooting with Speedlites EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series Non-Canon Flash Units EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras Features of EL/EX series Speedlites (sold separately) can be used in flash photography with the camera. For instructions, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual. Flash exposure compensation You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation).
Note The Speedlite will automatically fire an AF-assist beam as needed, if autofocusing is difficult under low light. You can also set flash exposure compensation on the Quick Control screen ( ) or in the [Flash function settings] setting of [ : External Speedlite control] ( ). The camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera is turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that support this feature.
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only. Set the camera's shooting mode to < > or < > and adjust the aperture value before shooting. When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units Sync speed The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at up to 1/250 sec. (or up to 1/200 sec. with [ : Shutter mode] set to [Mechanical]). With large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies depending on the model. Before shooting, confirm that flash sync is performed correctly by taking some test shots at a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
Flash Function Settings Flash Firing E-TTL Balance E-TTL II Flash Metering Continuous Flash Control Slow Synchro Flash Function Settings Flash Custom Function Settings Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite Custom Functions Functions of EL/EX Series Speedlites compatible with flash function settings can be set via a camera menu screen. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
2. Select an option. Flash Firing To enable flash photography, set to [Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist beam of the Speedlite, set to [Disable].
E-TTL Balance You can set your preferred appearance (balance) for flash shots. This setting enables you to adjust the ratio of ambient light to Speedlite light output. Set the balance to [Ambience priority] to lower the proportion of flash output and uses ambient light to produce lifelike shots with a natural mood. Especially useful when shooting dark scenes (indoors, for example). After switching to < > or < > mode, consider setting [Slow synchro] in [ : External Speedlite control] to [1/250-30sec.
E-TTL II Flash Metering Set to [Eval (FacePrty)] for flash metering suitable for shots of people. The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting is slower than when [Evaluative] or [Average] is selected. Set to [Evaluative] for flash metering that emphasizes firing in continuous shooting. If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered scene. Note Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be necessary.
Continuous Flash Control Set to [E-TTL each shot] to perform flash metering for each shot. Set to [E-TTL 1st shot] to perform flash metering for only the first shot before continuous shooting. The flash output level for the first shot is applied to all subsequent shots. Useful when prioritizing continuous shooting speed without recomposing shots. Caution Any subject movement in continuous shooting may cause exposure problems.
Slow Synchro You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in < > or < > mode. Note that the maximum flash synchronization speed varies depending on the [ : Shutter mode] setting. It is 1/250 sec. when set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] and 1/200 sec. when set to [Mechanical]. : 1/250-30sec. auto ( : 1/200-30sec. auto) The shutter speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250 (or 1/200) sec. to 30 sec. to suit the brightness. High-speed sync is also possible. : 1/250-1/60sec.
Flash Function Settings The information displayed on the screen, position of display, and available options vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other factors. For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.
Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography. [E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for automatic flash photography. [Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite's [Flash output level] yourself. [CSP] (Continuous shooting priority mode) is available when using a compatible Speedlite. This mode automatically reduces flash output by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop.
Wireless functions You can use radio or optical wireless transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-flash lighting. For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with wireless flash photography. Firing ratio control (RATIO) With a macro flash, you can set the firing ratio control. For details on firing ratio control, refer to the Instruction Manual of the macro flash.
Shutter synchronization Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after the shooting starts. Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds for natural-looking shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights. Set to [High-speed synchronization] for flash photography at higher shutter speeds than the maximum flash sync shutter speed.
Flash exposure bracketing Speedlites equipped with flash exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the external flash output automatically as three shots are taken at once.
Flash Custom Function Settings For details on the Speedlite's Custom Functions, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite. 1. Select [Flash C.Fn settings]. 2. Set the desired functions. Select the number. Select an option. Caution With an EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash). The Speedlite's Personal Function (P.
Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite Custom Functions 1. Select [Clear settings]. 2. Select the settings to be cleared. Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn's]. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to clear all flash settings or Custom Function settings.
White Balance White Balance [ ] Auto White Balance [ ] Custom White Balance [ ] Color Temperature White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [ ] (Ambience priority) or [ ] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object. In < > mode, [ ] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. 1.
3. Select a white balance setting. Turn the < > dial to make a selection. Note For [ ] and [ ] setting instructions, see [ To set your preferred color temperature, select [ > dial. turn the < ] Auto White Balance. ] in [ : White balance], then (Approx.
White Balance The human eye adapts to changes in lighting so that white objects look white under all kinds of lighting. Digital cameras determine white from the color temperature of lighting and, based on this, apply image processing to make color tones look natural in your shots.
[ ] Auto White Balance With [ ] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [ ] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color cast. 1. Select [ 2. Select [ With [ 3. : White balance]. ]. ] selected, press the < Select an option. 172 > button.
Caution Precautions when set to [ ] (White priority) The warm color cast of subjects may fade. When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the picture may not be reduced. When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [ ] (Ambience priority).
[ ] Custom White Balance With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot. 1. Shoot a white object. Aim the camera at a plain white object, so that white fills the screen. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < standard exposure for the white object. > and shoot to obtain You can use any of the white balance settings. 2.
3. Import the white balance data. Turn the < < >. > dial to select the image captured in step 1, then press Select [OK] to import the data. 4. Select [ 5. Select the custom white balance. : White balance]. Select [ ]. Caution If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
Note Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray card or standard 18% gray reflector (commercially available).
[ ] Color Temperature A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature. 1. Select [ 2. Set the color temperature. : White balance]. Select [ Turn the < ]. > dial to set a color temperature, then press < >. The color temperature can be set from approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K increments. Note When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
White Balance Correction White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. White Balance Correction 1. Select [ : WB Shift/Bkt.].
2. Set the white balance correction. Sample setting: A2, G1 Use < > to move the “■” mark on the screen to your preferred position. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. White balance is corrected in the direction you move the mark. On the right of the screen, [Shift] indicates the direction and correction amount, respectively. Pressing the < Press < > button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings. > to exit the setting.
White Balance Auto Bracketing White balance bracketing enables you to capture three images at once with different color tones. Setting the white balance bracketing amount In step 2 for White Balance Correction, when you turn the < > dial, the “■” mark on the screen will change to “■ ■ ■” (3 points). Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it counterclockwise sets the M/G bracketing.
Note The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias. You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot. The white balance icon blinks to indicate that white balance bracketing has been set.
Color Space The range of reproducible colors is called the “color space.” For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended. In < > mode, [sRGB] is set automatically. 1. Select [ 2. Set a color space option. : Color space]. Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then press < >. Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other professional applications. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
Picture Style Selection Picture Style Characteristics Symbols Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In < > mode, [ ] (Auto) is set automatically. 1. Select [ 2. Select a Picture Style. : Picture Style].
Picture Style Characteristics Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. Note If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style. Standard The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable for most scenes. Portrait For smooth skin tones, with slightly less sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits.
User Def. 1–3 You can add a new style based on presets such as [Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style file, then adjust it as needed ( ). With any User Defined Picture Style that has not yet been registered, pictures will be taken with the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Standard].
Symbols Icons on the Picture Style selection screen represent [Strength], [Fineness], and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numbers indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style. Sharpness Strength Fineness Threshold Contrast Saturation Color tone Filter effect (Monochrome) Toning effect (Monochrome) Caution For movie recording, “*, *” is indicated for the [Fineness] and [Threshold] parameters of [Sharpness].
Picture Style Customization Settings and Effects Monochrome Adjustment You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings. For details on customizing [Monochrome], see Monochrome Adjustment. 1. Select [ 2. Select a Picture Style. : Picture Style]. Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the < 187 > button.
3. Select an option. Select an option, then press < >. For details on settings and effects, see Settings and Effects. 4. Set the effect level. Adjust the effect level, then press < >. Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.
Note For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be set (not displayed). By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can restore the parameter settings of the respective Picture Style to the defaults. To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture Style, then shoot.
Monochrome Adjustment Filter effect With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more. Filter Sample Effects N:None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects. Ye:Yellow Blue sky will look more natural, and white clouds will look crisper. Or:Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant. R:Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.
Picture Style Registration You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1] – [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with different settings. Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software, ) can also be modified here. 1. Select [ 2. Select [User Def.]. : Picture Style]. Select [User Def. *], then press the < 191 > button.
3. Press < >. With [Picture Style] selected, press < 4. >. Select a base Picture Style. Select the base Picture Style, then press < >. Also select styles this way when adjusting styles registered to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software). 5. Select an option. Select an option, then press < 192 >.
6. Set the effect level. Adjust the effect level, then press < >. For details, see Picture Style Customization. Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *]. Blue style names in [User Def. *] have been changed from default values. Caution If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def.
Clarity You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges. Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a sharper appearance. 1. Select [ 2. Set the effect level. : Clarity]. Caution Setting clarity may darken or lighten the areas around boundaries in high-contrast images. The effect of this setting is not shown in images on the screen in still photo shooting.
Lens Aberration Correction Peripheral Illumination Correction Distortion Correction Digital Lens Optimizer Chromatic Aberration Correction Diffraction Correction Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction]. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Lens aberration correction].
3. Select a setting. Confirm that the name of the attached lens and (except for diffraction correction) [Correction data available] are displayed. If [Correction data not available] or [ Optimizer. ] is displayed, see Digital Lens Caution Not available when shooting multiple exposures. Peripheral Illumination Correction Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected. Caution Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
Distortion Correction Distortion (image warping) can be corrected. Caution To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the area seen in viewfinder shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the apparent resolution. Applying distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly. The amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies. Note With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.
Digital Lens Optimizer Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along with diffraction and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution. If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed by [Digital Lens Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual. Caution Image processing after you shoot takes longer when set to [High] (which causes the access lamp to be illuminated longer).
Chromatic Aberration Correction Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected. Note [Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Standard] or [High].
Diffraction Correction Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected. Caution Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction. The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be. For movie recording, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction is not possible.) Note “Diffraction correction” corrects degraded resolution not only from diffraction but also from the low-pass filter and other factors.
Note General notes for lens aberration correction Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc. If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after shooting is recommended. Corrections are applied even when an extender or life-size converter is attached.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction Noise that tends to occur in long exposures at shutter speeds of one sec. or slower can be reduced. 1. Select [ 2. Set a reduction option. : Long exp. noise reduction]. Auto For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting is effective enough in most cases. Enable Noise reduction is performed for all images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
Caution With [Auto] or [Enable] set, noise reduction after you shoot may take as long as exposure for the shot. Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting. [BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction You can reduce the image noise generated. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced. 1. Select [ 2. Set the level. : High ISO speed NR]. Low, Standard, High The camera applies an amount of noise reduction corresponding to your specified level.
Caution Precautions on Multi Shot Noise Reduction If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise reduction effect may become smaller. Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. Using a tripod is recommended. If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages. Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Dust Delete Data Acquisition Preparation Dust Delete Data Appending Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in case sensor cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically. Preparation Use an RF or EF lens. Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper. Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < > and set the focus to infinity (∞).
2. Select [OK]. After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed, a message will appear. Although there will be a mechanical sound of the shutter during the cleaning, no picture is taken.
3. Shoot a plain white object. Shoot with a plain white object (such as a new sheet of white paper) filling the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.). Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera. When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear. If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear.
Dust Delete Data Appending The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from now on. Acquiring Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended. For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual. File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.
Multiple Exposures Merging Multiple Exposures with a RAW Image Recorded on the Card Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be merged into a single image. 1. Select [ : Multiple exposure].
2. Set [Multiple exposure]. Select an option, then press < >. To exit shooting multiple exposures, select [Disable]. On:Func/Ctrl Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly. On:ContShtng Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects.
3. Set [Multi-expos ctrl]. Select a merging option, then press < >. Additive The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on [No. of exposures], set negative exposure compensation. Follow these basic guidelines to set the exposure compensation amount. Exposure compensation setting guidelines, by number of exposures Two exposures: –1 stop, three exposures: –1.5 stops, four exposures: –2 stops Average Based on the [No.
4. Set [No. of exposures]. Select the number of exposures, then press < 5. >. Specify the images to save. To save all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image, select [All images] and press < >. To save only the multiple-exposure image, select [Result only] and press < >.
6. Set [Continue Mult-exp]. Select an option, then press < >. With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends. With [Continuously], multiple-exposure shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable]. 7. Shoot the first exposure. When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the captured image will be displayed. The [ ] icon blinks. The number of remaining exposures is indicated on the screen (1) for reference. Pressing the < ( ).
8. Shoot the next exposures. Images captured so far are displayed merged. For only image display, press the < > button repeatedly. As you shoot, you can view the multiple-exposure image so far, check exposure, and see how the images will be merged by holding down the depth-of-field preview button (or the button assigned to [Depth-of-field preview] in [ : Customize buttons]). Multiple-exposure shooting will end when the set number of exposures are taken.
Caution The image quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent exposures. If [ : Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting. With [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] set, any noise, irregular colors, banding, or similar issues affecting images displayed as you shoot may look different in the final multiple-exposure image.
2. Select the first image. Turn the < > dial to select the first image, then press < >. Select [OK]. The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. 3. Take the picture. When you select the first image, the number of remaining exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.
Note You can also select a RAW image used in multiple-exposure shooting. Select [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting To view the multiple-exposure image so far, check exposure, and see how the images are merged, you can press the < > button before you finish shooting your specified number of exposures (when [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, but not with [On:ContShtng]). Pressing the < > button will display the operations possible during multiple-exposure shooting.
How are multiple-exposure files numbered? With the camera set to save all images, multiple-exposure image files are named with the next number after the number of the last single exposure used to create them. Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting? During multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off will not take effect.
HDR Mode Effects You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots. With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image. * HDR stands for High Dynamic Range. 1. Select [ 2.
3. Set [Effect]. See Effects for details on the settings and effects. 4. Set [Continuous HDR]. With [1 shot only], HDR shooting is canceled automatically after you finish shooting. With [Every shot], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable HDR]. 5. Set [Auto Image Align]. For handheld shooting, select [Enable]. When using a tripod, select [Disable].
6. Specify the images to save. To save the three images captured and the resulting HDR image, select [All images]. To save only the HDR image, select [HDR img only]. 7. Take the picture. When you press the shutter button completely, three consecutive images will be captured, and the HDR image will be recorded to the card.
Caution RAW HDR images are captured in JPEG image quality. RAW+JPEG HDR images are captured in the specified JPEG image quality. Expanded ISO speeds (L, H) are not available in HDR shooting. HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100–102400 (varies depending on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]). The flash will not fire during HDR shooting. AEB is not available. If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
Effects [ ] Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. [ ] Art standard While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Focus Bracketing Focus bracketing enables continuous shooting with the focal distance changed automatically after a single shot. From these images, you can create a single image in focus over a wide area by using an application that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS software). 1. Select [ 2. Set [Focus bracketing]. : Focus bracketing]. Select [Enable].
3. Set [Number of shots]. Specify the number of images captured per shot. Can be set in a range of [2]–[999]. 4. Set [Focus increment]. Specify how much to shift the focus. This amount is automatically adjusted to suit the aperture value at the time of shooting. Larger aperture values increase the focus shift and make focus bracketing cover a wider range under the same focus increment and number of shots. After completing the settings, press < 227 >.
5. Set [Exposure smoothing]. You can suppress changes in image brightness during focus bracketing by setting [Exposure smoothing] to [Enable], which compensates for differences between the displayed and actual aperture value (effective f/number), which varies by focal position. 6. Take the picture. To save your shots in a new folder, tap [ ] and select [OK]. Focus at the nearer end of your preferred focal range, then press the shutter button completely.
Caution Focus bracketing is intended for still photo shooting on a tripod. Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing, you can crop the image if necessary. For details on lenses compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website. Set [Exposure smoothing] to [Disable] with the following lenses, because they may cause changes in image brightness. • EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM • EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM • EF-S60mm f/2.
Interval Timer Shooting With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of shots, so that the camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to your interval until your specified number of shots are taken. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : Interval timer]. Select [Enable], then press the < 230 > button.
3. Set the shooting interval and number of shots. Select an option to set (hours : minutes : seconds / number of shots). Press < > to display [ ]. Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].) Interval Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59]. No. of shots Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on indefinitely until you stop it, set [00]. 4. Select [OK]. The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen.
5. Take the picture. First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval timer settings. During interval timer shooting, [ ] will blink. After the set number of shots are taken, the interval timer shooting will stop and be automatically canceled. Note Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots in advance is recommended. Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button completely.
Caution Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. Setting the lens's focus mode switch to < > prevents the camera from shooting unless subjects are in focus. Consider setting the mode to < > and focusing manually before shooting. If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended.
Shutter Mode You can choose the method of shutter release. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Shutter mode]. Mechanical Shooting activates the mechanical shutter. Recommended when shooting with the aperture of a bright lens wide open. Elec. 1st-curtain Shooting only activates the second-curtain shutter. Electronic Enables you to shoot without a shutter sound. In continuous shooting, the camera always shoots at high speed (up to approx. 20 shots/sec.).
Caution Defocused image areas may be incomplete when shooting near maximum aperture at high shutter speeds, depending on shooting conditions. If you dislike the appearance of defocused image areas, shooting as follows may give better results. • Shoot with an option other than [Elec. 1st-curtain]. • Lower the shutter speed. • Increase the aperture value. Precautions when set to [Electronic] Be responsible when using electronic shutter, and respect subject privacy and portrait rights.
Releasing Shutter without Card You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera. The default setting is [Enable]. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Disable]. : Release shutter without card].
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode) Focal Length Image stabilization by the camera reduces camera shake in still photo shooting. It can provide effective stabilization even when your lens is not equipped with Image Stabilizer. When using a lens equipped with Image Stabilizer, set the lens's Image Stabilizer switch to < >. 1. Select [ 2. Select [IS mode]. : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode]. Select [On].
3. Select [Still photo IS]. [Always]: Provides constant image stabilization. [Only for shot]: Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting. Caution [IS mode] and [Still photo IS] are not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is attached. In some cases, this may not provide sufficient stabilization for certain lenses. Note For details on image stabilization for movie recording, see Movie Digital IS.
1. Select [Focal length]. 2. Set the focal length. Turn the < Press < > dial to select the digit of the focal length. > to display [ ]. Set the desired number, then press < 3. >. (Returns to [ ].) Select [OK]. Caution Set [ : Release shutter w/o lens] to [Enable]. [Disable] prevents image stabilization. [Focal length] is not displayed when lenses are attached that support lens communication. Note Focal length can be set in a range of 1–1000 mm (in 1 mm increments).
Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. 1. Enable the Touch Shutter. Tap [ ] in the lower left of the screen. Each time you tap the icon, it will toggle between [ ] and [ ]. [ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable) The camera will focus on the spot you tap, then the picture will be taken. [ ] (Touch Shutter: Disable) You can tap a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
2. Tap the screen to shoot. Tap the face or subject on the screen. On the point you tap, the camera focuses (Touch AF) with your specified AF method. When [ ] is set, the AF point turns green when focus is achieved, then the picture is taken automatically. If focus is not achieved, the AF point turns orange and the picture cannot be taken. Tap the face or subject on the screen again. Caution The camera shoots in single shooting mode regardless of the drive mode setting ([ ], [ ], or [ ]).
Image Review Review Duration Viewfinder Review Review Duration To keep the image displayed immediately after you shoot, set to [Hold], and if you prefer not to have the image displayed, set to [Off]. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Review duration]. 3. Set a time option. : Image review].
Note When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in the [Display off] option of [ : Power saving].
Viewfinder Review Set to [Enable] for viewfinder display of your shots immediately after you shoot. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Viewfinder review]. 3. Select an option. : Image review]. Note [Viewfinder review] settings take effect when [Image review] is set to an option other than [Off].
High-Speed Display High-speed display that switches between each shot and the live image is available when shooting with [ : AF operation] set to [Servo AF] and the drive mode set to [ ] [High speed continuous]. Display is more responsive, making it easier to follow fast-moving subjects. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : High speed display]. Select [Enable] for display that switches between each shot and the live image. Caution Images may waver or flicker during high-speed display.
Note High-speed display is always used when [ 246 : Shutter mode] is set to [Electronic].
Metering Timer You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the duration of exposure value display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such as pressing the shutter button halfway. 1. Select [ 2. Set a time option. : Metering timer].
Exposure Simulation With exposure simulation, image brightness more closely matches the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots. 1. Select [ 2. Set an option. : Expo. simulation]. Enable ( ) The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly. During Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see ( ).
Shooting Information Display Customizing Information on the Screen Customizing Information in the Viewfinder Viewfinder Vertical Display Grid Histogram Setting Focus Distance Display Clearing Settings You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the viewfinder when you shoot. Customizing Information on the Screen 1. Select [ : Shooting info. disp.].
2. Select [Screen info. settings]. 3. Select screens. Turn the < camera. > dial to select screens of information to show on the For information you prefer not to display, press < checkmark [ ]. To edit the screen, press the < 250 > button.
4. Edit the screen. Turn the < > dial to select options to show on the screen of information. For items you prefer not to display, press < [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder 1. Select [ 2. Select [VF info/toggle settings]. 3. Select screens. : Shooting info. disp.]. Turn the < camera. > dial to select screens of information to show on the For information you prefer not to display, press < checkmark [ ]. To edit the screen, press the < 252 > button.
4. Edit the screen. Turn the < > dial to select options to show on the screen of information. For items you prefer not to display, press < [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
Viewfinder Vertical Display You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are shooting still photos vertically. 1. Select [ 2. Select [VF vertical display]. : Shooting info. disp.].
3. Select an option. On Information is automatically rotated, making it easier to read. Off Information is not automatically rotated.
Grid A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Grid display]. 3. Select an option. : Shooting info. disp.].
Histogram You can select the content and display size of the histogram. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Histogram disp]. 3. Select an option. : Shooting info. disp.]. Select the content ([Brightness] or [RGB]) and display size ([Large] or [Small]).
Setting Focus Distance Display You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus distance display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Focus distance disp]. 3. Select the timing of display. : Shooting info. disp.].
4. Select the unit of measurement. Note For certain RF lenses, magnification is also displayed.
Clearing Settings 1. Select [ 2. Select [Reset]. 3. Select [OK]. : Shooting info. disp.].
Viewfinder Display Format 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : VF display format].
Display Performance You can select the performance parameter to prioritize in shooting screen display for still photos. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Disp. performance].
Metering Mode Selection You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In < > mode, evaluative metering is set automatically. 1. Press the < > button ( ). With an image displayed, press the < 2. > button. Select the metering mode. To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < To select the metering mode, turn the < < > left or right. > or < > up or down. > dial, or press Evaluative metering General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects.
Center-weighted average The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen weighted more heavily. Note By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With [ ], holding down the shutter button halfway locks the exposure value (AE lock) after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF. With [ / / ], the exposure value is set at the moment the picture is taken (without locking the exposure value when the shutter button is pressed halfway). With [ : AE lock meter.
Manual Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation is available in < >, < >, < >, < >, and < > modes. For details on exposure compensation when < > mode and ISO Auto are both set, see M: Manual Exposure, and see Fv: Flexible-Priority AE for < > mode. 1. Check the exposure. Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator. 2. Set the compensation amount.
Note The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to < >.
Exposure Lock (AE Lock) AE Lock Effects You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you will take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the < > button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc. 1. Focus on the subject. Press the shutter button halfway. The exposure value will be displayed. 2. Press the < > button ( ).
3. Recompose and take the picture. When you are to take more pictures while maintaining the AE lock, keep holding down the < > button and press the shutter button to take another picture. Note AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures. AE Lock Effects Metering Mode Selection AF point selection Automatic Selection Exposure centered on the AF point in focus is locked. Manual Selection Exposure centered on the selected AF point is locked. Center-weighted exposure is locked. * When [ locked.
General Still Photo Shooting Information Display General Still Photo Shooting Precautions Information Display For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see Information Display. Note White display of the [ ] icon indicates that your shots will be about as bright as the image displayed. If the [ ] icon is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions.
General Still Photo Shooting Precautions Caution Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. Image quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable. Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.
Images and display Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image. Although noise may be noticeable in images under low light (even at low ISO speeds), there will be less noise in your shots, due to differences in image quality between displayed and captured images. The screen may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes. In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you will use.
Movie Recording For movie recording, set the Mode dial to < >. Caution When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera settings again before recording movies. Note You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo shooting. Movies recorded in < > shooting mode are recorded as < > mode movies. > are recorded as < > mode movies.
Tab Menus: Movie Recording Shooting 1 (1) Shooting mode (2) Movie rec quality (3) Movie cropping (4) Sound recording Shooting 2 (1) Exposure comp. (2) ISO speed settings (3) HDR PQ settings (4) Auto Lighting Optimizer (5) Highlight tone priority (6) Av 1/8-stop incr.
Shooting 3 (1) White balance (2) Custom White Balance (3) WB correction (4) Picture Style • Picture Style Selection • Picture Style Customization • Picture Style Registration (5) Canon Log settings (6) Clarity Shooting 4 (1) Lens aberration correction (2) High ISO speed NR 274
Shooting 5 (1) HDR Movie Recording (2) Time-lapse movie Shooting 6 (1) Movie self-timer (2) Remote control 275
Shooting 7 (1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode (2) Shutter btn function for movies (3) Metering timer (4) Zebra settings (5) Shooting info. disp.
Movie Recording Autoexposure Recording ISO Speed in [ ] Mode Manual Exposure Recording ISO Speed in [ ] Mode Shutter Speed Still Photo Shooting Information Display (Movie Recording) Autoexposure Recording Exposure is controlled automatically to suit the brightness. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Select [ >. : Shooting mode].
3. Select [Movie auto exposure]. 4. Focus on the subject. Before recording a movie, focus with AF ( ) or manual focus ( ). By default, [ : Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] so that the camera always keeps focusing ( ). When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with the current AF method.
5. Record the movie. Press the movie shooting button to start recording a movie. You can also start recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen. While the movie is being recorded, the [ REC] icon (1) will be displayed in the upper right of the screen. Sound is recorded with the movie microphone (2). To stop recording the movie, press the movie shooting button again. You can also stop recording a movie by tapping [ ] on the screen.
ISO Speed in [ ] Mode ISO speed is set automatically. See ISO Speed in Movie Recording.
Manual Exposure Recording You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording. 1. Set the Mode dial to < 2. Select [ 3. Select [Movie manual exp.]. >. : Shooting mode].
4. Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed. Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator. Turn the < > dial to set the shutter speed (1), the < > dial to set the aperture value (2), and the < > dial to set the ISO speed (3). Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate ( 282 ).
5. Focus and record the movie. Same as steps 4 and 5 for Autoexposure Recording. Caution ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50) in movie recording. During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO speed, which may record changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO speeds. When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended.
ISO Speed in [ ] Mode You can set the ISO speed manually or select [ ISO speed, see ISO Speed in Movie Recording. 284 ] to set it automatically.
Shutter Speed Available shutter speeds in [ ] (manual exposure) mode vary depending on the frame rate of your specified movie recording quality. Shutter Speed (Sec.
Still Photo Shooting Still photo shooting is not supported in movie recording mode. To shoot still photos, turn the Mode dial to switch to another shooting mode.
Information Display (Movie Recording) For details on the icons on the movie recording screen, see Information Display. Caution The remaining time displayed for movie recording is only a guideline. Movie recording may stop before the initially displayed recording time elapses if the red [ ] icon appears due to high internal camera temperature during recording ( ).
Movie Recording Quality Movie Recording Size 4K Movie Recording Image Area Cards That Can Record Movies High Frame Rate Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Movie Recording Time Limit You can set the image size, frame rate, and compression method in the [Movie rec. size] menu of [ : Movie rec quality]. The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending on the [ : Video system] setting ( ).
Movie Recording Size Image size [ ] 3840×2160 The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. [ ] 1920×1080 The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. Caution If you change the [ : Video system] setting, also set [ : Movie rec quality] again. Other devices may not play movies such as 4K, / , and High Frame Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
4K Movie Recording Recording 4K movies requires a stable card with a fast writing speed. For details, see Cards That Can Record Movies. 4K movie recording greatly increases the processing load, which may increase the internal camera temperature faster or higher than for regular movies. If [ ] or a red [ ] icon appears during movie recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not remove the card immediately.
Image Area The movie image area varies depending on factors such as movie recording quality and cropped shooting settings and the lens used.
Frame rate (fps: frames per second) [ ] 119.9 fps/[ ] 59.94 fps/[ ] 29.97 fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For [ ], see High Frame Rate. [ ] 100.0 fps/[ ] 50.00 fps/[ ] 25.00 fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). For [ ], see High Frame Rate. [ ] 23.98 fps Mainly for cinematic purposes. set to [For NTSC]. (23.
Cards That Can Record Movies See Card performance requirements for details on cards that can record at each level of movie recording quality. Test cards by recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your specified size ( ). Caution Before recording 4K movies, format cards by selecting [Low level format] in [ : Format card] ( ). If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be recorded properly.
High Frame Rate You can record Full HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or 100.0 fps. This is ideal for recording movies that will be played back in slow motion. The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Movies are recorded in or quality. Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies. Time code display during movie recording advances 4 sec. per second. Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps movie files, they are played in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32. With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically. When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie file individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order.
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute For details, see Movie recording.
Movie Recording Time Limit When recording non-High Frame Rate movies The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min. 59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the movie as a new file). When recording High Frame Rate movies The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Once 7 min. 29 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops.
Movie Cropping With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the image, as if using a telephoto lens. Recording movies with EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie cropping feature. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : Movie cropping]. Caution High Frame Rate movies cannot be recorded with movie cropping. The center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the recording area, when [ : Movie digital IS] in [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to [On] or [Enhanced].
Sound Recording Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level Wind Filter Attenuator You can record movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphone or an external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level. Use [ : Sound recording] to set sound recording functions. Caution Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function is not recommended.
Note In < > mode, the settings available for [ : Sound recording] are [On] or [Off]. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level. Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI, except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable]. In case of feedback from television audio output, move the camera away from the television or turn down the volume. The volume balance between L/R (left/right) cannot be adjusted. Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
Wind Filter Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion in windy outdoor scenes. Only activated when the camera's built-in microphone is used. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.
Attenuator Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended. Microphone Normally, the camera's built-in microphones record in stereo. Any external microphones with a 3.5 mm mini-jack connected to the camera's external microphone IN terminal ( ) are used instead.
Canon Log Settings Shooting Settings Canon Log Image Quality Canon Log gamma curve takes full advantage of image sensor characteristics to ensure wide dynamic range for movies that will be processed in postproduction. With minimal loss of detail in shadows and highlights, movies retain more visual information across the dynamic range. To work with Canon Log movies in postproduction, you can apply look-up tables (LUTs). LUT data can be downloaded from the Canon website. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Canon Log].
3. Select [On] ( 4. Set the options as desired. ). Set [View Assist.], [Color Matrix], [Characteristics], and [Color space].
Canon Log On Enables 10-bit recording of Canon Log movies to the card. Movies can also be recorded to an external device that supports 10-bit recording. Note YCbCr 4:2:2 (10-bit) color sampling and the BT.709/BT.2020 color space are used in Canon Log recording.
View Assist. When played on the camera, these movies may look darker and have lower contrast than movies recorded with a Picture Style applied, due to Canon Log image characteristics, which are intended to ensure a wide dynamic range. For clearer display that makes it easier to check details, set [View Assist.] to [On]. Setting this feature to [On] does not affect movies recorded to the card, which are recorded using Canon Log characteristics.
Characteristics Adjust as needed. Select an option ([Sharpness: Strength], [Saturation], or [Hue]), adjust the effect level, then press < >. Sharpness: Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis Saturation −4: Low +4: High Reds −4: Toward magenta +4: Toward yellow Greens −4: Toward yellow +4: Toward cyan Blues −4: Toward cyan +4: Toward magenta Hue* 7: Strong outline emphasis * Reds, greens, and blues cannot be adjusted separately.
Shooting Settings Manually setting the ISO speed to 100–320 will make the dynamic range narrower. Canon Log offers a dynamic range of approx. 800% at ISO 400 or higher. ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, and 320 are expanded ISO speeds. [ ] is displayed when an ISO speed is set.
Canon Log Image Quality With Canon Log, movies may be affected by horizontal banding, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. Record a few test movies and check the results in advance. In particular, noise may become more noticeable if you enhance the contrast when color-grading your movies. With Canon Log, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected by noise or uneven gradation, exposure, or colors.
HDR Movie Recording You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast scenes. 1. Select [ : HDR Movie Recording]. Select [Enable]. 2. Record an HDR movie. Record the movie in the same way as normal movie recording. For details on file sizes and the recording time available, see Movie recording.
Caution HDR movie recording is not available with [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] set to [ Digital IS], or when set to [ : Time-lapse movie], [ : Highlight tone priority], [ : Canon Log settings], or [ : HDR PQ settings]. Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of the movie may look distorted. This is more noticeable in handheld recording affected by camera shake, so consider using a tripod.
Time-Lapse Movies Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-Lapse Movies Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
3. Set [Interval]. Select [Interval]. As you set the number, refer to the [ playback time (2). ] time required (1) and [ ] Select an option (hours : minutes : seconds). Press < > to display [ ]. Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].) Can be set in a range of [00:00:02]–[99:59:59]. (An interval of once per second is not available.) Select [OK] to register the setting.
4. Set [No. of shots]. Select [No. of shots]. As you set the number, refer to the time required ([ time ([ ]). ]) and playback Select the digit. Press < > to display [ ]. Set the desired number, then press < >. (Returns to [ ].) Can be set in a range of [0002]–[3600]. Make sure the playback time ([ ]) is not displayed in red. Select [OK] to register the setting. The playback time ([ ]) is displayed in red if the card does not have enough free space to record the specified number of shots.
5. Select [Movie rec. size]. (3840×2160) The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. Additionally, the frame rate is 29.97 fps ( ) for NTSC and 25.00 fps ( ) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 ( ) format with ) compression. ALL-I ( (1920×1080) The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The ) for aspect ratio is 16:9. Additionally, the frame rate is 29.97 fps ( NTSC and 25.
6. Set [Auto exposure]. Fixed 1st frame When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots. Each frame Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness.
7. Set [Screen auto off]. Disable Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed. (The screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started. Enable Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the shooting started. Caution Even if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the screen turns off during exposure.
8. Set [Beep as img taken]. Set to [Disable] to prevent the camera from beeping for each shot. 9. Check the settings. Time required (1) Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed. Playback time (2) Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals. 10. Close the menu.
11. Read the message. Read the message and select [OK]. 12. Take a test shot. As in still photo shooting, set the exposure and shooting functions, then press the shutter button halfway to focus. Press the shutter button completely to take a test shot, which is recorded to the card as a still photo. If there are no problems with the test shot, go to the next step. To take more test shots, repeat this step. Note Test shots are captured in JPEG quality.
13. Press the movie shooting button. The camera is now ready to start recording a time-lapse movie. To return to step 12, press the movie shooting button again.
14. Record the time-lapse movie. Press the < > button and double-check the Time required (1) and Interval (2) shown on the screen. Press the shutter button completely to start recording the timelapse movie. AF will not work during time-lapse movie recording. A recording icon “●” is displayed on the screen as the time-lapse movie is recorded. When the set number of shots are taken, the time-lapse movie recording ends. To cancel recording time-lapse movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
Note Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots as in step 12 and recording test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended. The movie's field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse movie recording is approx. 100%. To cancel time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter button completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
Caution Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected. Movie Servo AF will not function. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec.
Set [ : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] if you will connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS Utility (EOS software). Options other than [Disable] will prevent the camera from communicating with the computer. Image stabilization is not applied in time-lapse movie recording. Time-lapse movie shooting ends if the power switch is set to < >, for example, and the setting is changed to [Disable]. Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-Lapse Movies For guidelines on how long you can record time-lapse movies (until the battery runs out), see Movie recording.
Movie Self-Timer Movie recording can be started by the self-timer. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. 3. Record the movie. : Movie self-timer]. After you press the movie shooting button or tap [ ], the camera displays the number of seconds left before recording and beeps. Note To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press < 326 >.
Image Stabilizer (IS Mode) IS Mode Movie Digital IS The camera's [IS mode] and [Movie digital IS] features reduce camera shake as movies are recorded. They can provide effective stabilization even when your lens is not equipped with Image Stabilizer. When using a lens equipped with Image Stabilizer, set the lens's Image Stabilizer switch to < >. IS mode 1. Select [ 2. Select [IS mode]. : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode]. Select [On].
Caution [IS mode] is not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is attached.
Movie Digital IS 1. Select [ 2. Select a [ : IS (Image Stabilizer) mode]. Digital IS] option. Off ( ) Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled. On ( ) Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified. Enhanced ( ) Compared to when [On] is set, stronger camera shake can be corrected. The image will be more magnified.
Caution Movie digital IS will not function when the lens's optical Image Stabilizer switch is set to < >. With non-IS lenses, setting [ Digital IS] to [On] or [Enhanced] also sets [IS mode] to [On]. Although movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using EF-S lenses or movie cropping, the image area is further reduced. With a lens whose focal length is longer than 1000 mm, Movie digital IS will not function. Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording sizes.
Shutter Button Function for Movies You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie recording. Caution In movie recording, the [Shutter btn function for movies] setting overrides any function assigned to the shutter button in [ : Customize buttons]. 1. Select [ : Shutter btn function for movies].
2. Select an option. Half-press Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button halfway. Fully-press Specify the function performed by pressing the shutter button completely. With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie recording not only with the movie shooting button but also by pressing the shutter button completely, or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately).
Zebra Settings To help you adjust exposure before or during movie recording, you can display a striped pattern over or around image areas of a specified brightness. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Zebra]. : Zebra settings]. Select [On].
3. Select [Zebra pattern]. [Zebra 1]: Displays left-slanting stripes around areas of the specified brightness. [Zebra 2]: Displays right-slanting stripes over areas that exceed the specified brightness. [Zebra 1+2]: Displays both [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2]. An overlapping zebra pattern is displayed where the [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2] display areas overlap. 4. Set the level. Zebra 1 level Zebra 2 level Set by turning the < > or < 334 > dial or pressing < > up or down.
Note The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when HDR-PQ is set. Note that the maximum brightness value varies depending on [ : Highlight tone priority] and [ : Picture Style] settings. The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when Canon Log or an expanded ISO speed is set. Checking the zebra display level in advance is recommended when you will set [Zebra pattern].
Time Code Count Up Start Time Setting Movie Recording Count Movie Play Count HDMI Drop Frame Time codes record the time automatically as movies are recorded. Time codes always record elapsed hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. They are mainly used when movies are edited. To set up the time code, use [ : Time code]. Caution Time codes may not be displayed correctly if your movies are played back on devices other than the camera.
Count Up Rec run The time code advances only during movie recording. Time codes in each movie file recorded continue from the last time code in the previous file. Free run The time code keeps advancing, even when you are not recording. Caution When set to [Free run], time codes are not added to High Frame Rate movies that you record. When set to [Free run], time codes will be affected by any changes to settings for time, zone, or daylight saving time ( ).
Start Time Setting You can set the initial time of the time code. Manual input setting Enables you to set any starting hour, minute, second, and frame. Reset Resets the time set with [Manual input setting] or [Set to camera time] to “00:00:00.” or “00:00:00:” ( ). Set to camera time Matches the hour, minute, and second set as the time on the camera. Sets the frame value to “00.
Movie Recording Count You can select how time is displayed on the movie recording screen. Rec time During recording standby, displays the available recording time. During recording, displays the time that has elapsed since movie recording began (1). Time code Displays the time code during movie recording (2). Caution Display of the available recording time may change during recording standby.
Movie Play Count You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen. Rec time Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback. Time code Displays the time code during movie playback. Note Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except for High Frame Rate movies set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting. The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie play count], so that these settings always match.
HDMI Time code Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an external device via HDMI. • Off No time code is added to HDMI video output. • On Time codes are added to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec Command] is displayed. Rec Command For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can synchronize recording to when you start and stop recording movies on the camera. • Off Recording is started and stopped by the external device.
Drop Frame The time code's frame count will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and the time code if the frame rate is set to (119.9 fps), (59.94 fps), or (29.97 fps). The discrepancy is corrected automatically when [Enable] is set. Enable Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: drop frame). Disable The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: non-drop frame). Time codes are displayed as follows. • Enable (DF) 00:00:00. (Playback: 00:00:00.
Other Menu Functions [ 2] [ 3] [ 4] [ 6] [ 7] [ 8] 2] [ Exposure comp. Exposure compensation can be adjusted in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3-stop increments. For details on exposure compensation, see Manual Exposure Compensation. ISO speed settings • ISO speed In [ ] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto. • ISO speed range You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum). ISO expansion can also be configured.
HDR PQ settings For details on HDR PQ settings, see HDR PQ Settings. Auto Lighting Optimizer Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. For details on Auto Lighting Optimizer, see Auto Lighting Optimizer. Highlight tone priority You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies. For details on Highlight tone priority, see Highlight Tone Priority. Av 1/8-stop incr. • Menu Screen You can set aperture values on a finer scale when recording movies with an RF lens.
Auto slow shutter You can choose whether to record movies that are brighter and less affected by image noise than when set to [Disable] by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light. Available in < > recording mode. Applies when the frame rate of the movie recording size is or . • Disable Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
[ 3] White balance For details on white balance, see White Balance. Custom White Balance For details on custom white balance, see Custom White Balance. WB correction For details on white balance correction, see White Balance Correction. Picture Style For details on Picture Styles, see Picture Style Selection. Clarity For details on clarity, see Clarity.
[ 4] Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and chromatic aberration correction can be corrected as you record movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see Lens Aberration Correction. High ISO speed NR For details on High ISO speed noise reduction, see High ISO Speed Noise Reduction.
[ 6] Remote control By setting to [Enable], you can start or stop movie recording with Remote Controller RC-6 or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (both sold separately).
[ 7] Metering timer For details on the metering timer, see Metering Timer. Shooting info. disp. For details on shooting information display, see Shooting Information Display. VF display format For details on the viewfinder display format, see Viewfinder Display Format.
[ 8] Overheat control Set to [On] to conserve battery power and help prevent the camera from overheating while waiting to shoot. As a result, it may enable you to record movies over a longer period. Caution Image quality on the standby screen may differ from image quality on the screen during movie recording. Briefly when you start recording movies, image display may remain on the current frame instead of being updated.
HDMI display You can specify how movies are displayed as they are recorded via HDMI to an external device. Movie output itself corresponds to the [Movie rec. size] setting. The default setting is [ ]. • + Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other device, via HDMI output. Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are shown on the other device via HDMI, not on the camera screen. • Deactivates the camera screen during output via HDMI, so that the screen is blank.
Caution HDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about the card space, battery level, or high internal temperature ( ) via HDMI. During HDMI output, display of the next image may take some time if you switch between movies of different recording qualities or frame rates. Avoid operating the camera when recording movies to external devices, which may cause information to be displayed in the HDMI video output.
General Movie Recording Precautions Caution Precautions for movie recording Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If you record something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result. If [ ] or [ ] is set and the ISO speed or aperture value changes during movie recording, the white balance may also change.
[ ] icon [ ] may be displayed if repeated movie recording or extended use of Live View display increases the camera’s internal temperature. Turn off the camera or take other measures when [ ] is displayed, and wait until the camera cools down. The camera will turn off automatically if you continue recording while [ ] is displayed. The camera may also turn off automatically if you continue using Live View display while [ ] is displayed.
Audio restrictions Note that the following restrictions apply when [ : Movie rec quality] is set to (NTSC) or (PAL), or when [ : Audio compression] is set to [Enable]. • Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames. • When you play back movies in Windows, movie images and sound may become slightly out of synchronization. Note Notes for movie recording Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card. Focusing is also possible by pressing the < > button.
AF/Drive This chapter describes autofocus operation and drive modes and introduces menu settings on the AF [ ] tab. < to the right of titles indicates functions only available in < >, or < > mode. >, < Note < > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) AF1 (1) AF operation (2) AF method (3) Subject to detect (4) Eye detection (5) Continuous AF (6) Movie Servo AF (7) Touch & drag AF settings AF2 (1) MF peaking settings (2) Focus guide (3) AF-assist beam firing Note When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is displayed on the [ 2] tab.
AF3 (1) Case 1 (2) Case 2 (3) Case 3 (4) Case 4 (5) Case A (6) Tracking sensitivity (7) Accel./decel. tracking AF4 (1) Lens electronic MF (2) One-Shot AF release prior.
AF5 (1) Initial Servo AF pt for (2) Focus ring rotation (3) RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity (4) sensitivity- AF pt select 359
In < > mode, the following screens are displayed.
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording) AF1 (1) AF method (2) Subject to detect (3) Eye detection (4) Movie Servo AF (5) Touch & drag AF settings Note When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is displayed on the [ 1] tab.
AF3 (1) Movie Servo AF speed (2) Movie Servo AF track sens.
AF Operation One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Servo AF for Moving Subjects You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. 1. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < 2. Select [ 3. Select an option. : AF operation]. 363 >.
Note If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. With One-Shot AF, shooting is not possible even by pressing the shutter button completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult. With Servo AF, the camera shoots even when subjects are not in focus.
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture. For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the Drive Mode.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the Drive Mode.
Selecting the AF Method AF Method Selecting the AF Method (Face)+Tracking: Subject to Detect Eye Detection Spot AF / 1-Point AF / Expand AF Area: / Expand AF Area: Around / Zone AF / Large Zone AF: Vertical / Large Zone AF: Horizontal Magnified View AF Shooting Tips Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult AF Range AF Method : +Tracking The camera detects and focuses on faces of people or animals. An AF point [ over any face detected, which is then tracked.
With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF ( ). As long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting, focusing will continue. : Spot AF The camera focuses in a narrower area than 1-point AF. : 1-point AF The camera focuses using a single AF point [ 368 ].
: Expand AF area: Focuses using one AF point [ ] and AF points outlined here in blue. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Zone AF. When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [ ]. : Expand AF area: Around Focuses using one AF point [ ] and surrounding AF points outlined here in blue, which makes it easier to focus on moving subjects than with Expand AF area: .
: Zone AF Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area, which makes focusing easier than with Expand AF area. Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), subject motion, and subject distance. AF points in focus are displayed with [ ].
: Large Zone AF: Horizontal Uses auto selection AF in a horizontal Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and also effective for moving subjects. Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), subject motion, and subject distance. AF points in focus are displayed with [ ].
Selecting the AF Method You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. If you prefer to focus manually, see Manual Focus. 1. Select [ 2. Select the AF method. : AF method]. Note In < > mode, [ +Tracking] is set automatically. To set the AF method, you can also press the < > button and then the < > button. The following descriptions apply to the camera with AF operation set to [One-Shot AF] ( ). With [Servo AF] ( ) set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved.
(Face)+Tracking: The camera detects and focuses on faces of people or animals. If a face moves, the AF point [ ] also moves to track the face. You can set [ : Eye detection] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus ( 1. Check the AF point. An AF point [ ] appears over any face detected. To choose a face to focus on when multiple faces can be detected, > button to change the AF point to [ ], then use press the < < >. As you use < >, the AF point changes again to [ ].
2. Focus and take the picture. Once you press the shutter button halfway and the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green and the camera beeps. An orange AF point indicates that the camera could not focus on subjects. Note Selecting the face of a person or animal manually by tapping the screen or using < > changes the AF frame to [ ] and locks onto that subject for tracking, and the camera tracks the subject even if it moves within the screen. To release locked tracking, tap [ ] or press < >.
Caution Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF operation setting. If the subject's face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible. Adjust the focus manually ( ) so that the face can be detected, then perform AF. Objects other than a human face or animal face or body may be detected. Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
3. Set the AF point. An Area AF frame (1) and AF point (2) are displayed. To move the AF point into position for focusing, press the < button and then use < >, or tap the screen, then press < To center the AF point while using < >, press < > straight in. To center the AF point after you have confirmed it, tap [ < >. 376 > >.
Subject to Detect You can specify conditions for automatic selection of the main subject to track. Takes effect when the AF method is Face+Tracking, Zone AF, or Large Zone AF (vertical or horizontal). People Prioritizes the faces or heads of people as the main subjects to track. When a person's face or head cannot be detected, the camera may track all or part of their body. Animals Detects animals (dogs, cats, or birds) and people and prioritizes detection results for animals as the main subjects to track.
Eye Detection With the AF method set to [ in focus. +Tracking], you can shoot with the eyes of people or animals 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : Eye detection].
3. Aim the camera at the subject. An AF point is displayed around their eye. To choose an eye to focus on, press the < > button to change the AF point to [ ], then use < >. As you use < >, the AF point ]. changes again to [ You can also tap the screen to choose an eye. If your selected eye is not detected, an eye to focus on is selected automatically. 4. Take the picture. Caution Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and shooting conditions.
Spot AF / 1-Point AF / Expand AF Area: / Expand AF Area: Around / Zone AF / Large Zone AF: Vertical / Large Zone AF: Horizontal You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF screens are used as an example. 1. Check the AF point. The AF point (1) will appear. With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed. With Zone AF, Large Zone AF: Vertical, or Large Zone AF: Horizontal, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.
2. Move the AF point. Press the < > button, use < > to move the AF point into position for focusing, then press < > (but note that with some lenses, it may not move to the edge of the screen). To center the AF point while using < >, press < > straight in. You can also focus by tapping a position on the screen. To center the AF point or Zone AF frame, tap [ 3. ] or press < >. Focus and take the picture. Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.
Caution The camera continues to switch the active AF point [ ] to track subjects when Zone AF or Large Zone AF (vertical or horizontal) is set to Servo AF, but tracking may not be possible under some shooting conditions, such as when subjects are small. Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select an AF point in the center. Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF operation setting.
Magnified View To check the focus when the AF method is other than [ +Tracking], magnify display by > button (or tapping [ ]). approx. 5× or 10× by pressing the < Magnification is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF], [1-point AF], [Expand AF area: ], and [Expand AF area: Around] and on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF], [Large Zone AF: Vertical], and [Large Zone AF: Horizontal]. Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the shutter button halfway when set to [Spot AF], and [1-point AF].
AF Shooting Tips Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. Image brightness may change before and after autofocusing. Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease. If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped. Subjects in low light. Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction. Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.). Fine lines and subject outlines. Under light sources with constantly changing brightness, colors, or patterns.
AF Range The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens, aspect ratio, and image quality used, and whether you are shooting 4K movies or using features such as Movie cropping or Movie digital IS.
Continuous AF This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : Continuous AF]. Caution Fewer shots are available when set to [Enable], because the lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie recording. 1. Select [ : Movie Servo AF].
2. Select [Enable]. Enable • The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway. • To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by tapping [ ] in the lower left of the screen. • When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after operations such as pressing the < > or < > button or changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
Caution Precautions when set to [Movie Servo AF: Enable] Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult • A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera. • A subject moving at a close distance to the camera. • When shooting with a higher aperture value. • Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult. Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the possible movie recording time ( ) will be shortened.
Touch & Drag AF Settings Touch & Drag AF Positioning Method Active Touch Area You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by tapping or dragging on the screen as you look through the viewfinder. Touch & Drag AF 1. Select [ 2. Select [Touch & drag AF]. : Touch & drag AF settings]. Select [Enable].
Positioning Method You can set how positions are specified by tapping or dragging. 1. Set [Positioning method]. Absolute The AF point moves to the tapped or dragged position on the screen. Relative The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter where you tap the screen.
Active Touch Area You can specify the area of the screen used for tap and drag operations. 1. Set [Active touch area]. Note Tapping the screen when [ +Tracking] is set displays a round orange frame [ ]. After you lift your finger at the position to move the AF point to, [ ] is displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection, press < >.
Manual Focus Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis) Focus Guide AF-Assist Beam Firing If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and focus manually. 1. Set the lens's focus mode switch to < >. Turn the lens focusing ring to set the approximate focus. 2. Magnify the image. Each press of the < follows.
3. Move the magnified area. Use < > to move the magnified area into position for focusing. To center the magnified area, press < 4. > straight in or press < >. Focus manually. While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. After achieving focus, press the < view. > button to return to the normal Note In magnified view, the exposure is locked. Even when focusing manually, you can use Touch Shutter to shoot.
Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis) Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Peaking]. : MF peaking settings]. Select [On]. 3. Set [Level] and [Color]. Set as necessary.
Caution In magnified view, peaking display is not shown. During HDMI output, peaking display is not shown on equipment connected via HDMI. Note that peaking display is shown on the camera screen when [ : HDMI display] is set to [ + ]. MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off]. Note Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
Focus Guide Setting [Focus guide] to [On] provides a guide frame that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. The guide frame is displayed near any eyes that are detected for the main subject when [ : AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] and [ : Eye detection] is set to [Enable]. 1. Select [ 2. Select [On]. : Focus guide]. After pressing the < > button, you can use < > to move the guide frame in the direction you press (except in < > mode).
The guide frame indicates the current position in focus and adjustment amount as follows.
Adjustment information not detected Caution Under difficult shooting conditions for AF ( ), the guide frame may not be displayed correctly. Higher aperture values are more likely to prevent correct guide frame display. No AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed. The guide frame is not displayed in these situations. • When the lens's focus mode switch is set to < > • When display is magnified The guide frame is not displayed correctly during shifting or tilting of TS-E lenses.
AF-Assist Beam Firing You can enable or disable AF-assist beam firing of the camera or a Speedlite for EOS cameras. 1. Select [AF-assist beam firing]. 2. Select an option. [ON] Enable Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed. [OFF] Disable Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the AF-assist beam. [LED] LED AF assist beam only Enables LED AF-assist beam firing by Speedlites equipped with this feature, when these flash units are attached.
Caution If a Speedlite's [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to [Disable], the AF-assist beam will not be emitted.
Servo AF Characteristics Case Details Case 1: Versatile Multi-Purpose Setting Case 2: Continue to Track Subjects, Ignoring Possible Obstacles Case 3: Instantly Focus on Subjects Suddenly Entering AF Points Case 4: For Subjects That Accelerate or Decelerate Quickly Case A: Tracking Automatically Adapts to Subject Movement Parameters Adjusting Case Parameters Shooting with AI Servo AF/Servo AF can be easily tailored to your subjects or shooting situations by selecting a Case option.
Case Details Cases 1 to A are five combinations of settings for “Tracking sensitivity” and “Accel./decel. tracking.” Referring to the following table, select the case for your subject and shooting situation.
Case 1: Versatile Multi-Purpose Setting Default • Tracking sensitivity: 0 • Accel./decel. tracking: 0 Standard setting suited to moving subjects in general. Suitable for many kinds of subjects and scenes. In the following situations, select [Case 2] to [Case 4] instead: non-subjects moving across AF points, elusive subjects, or subjects that suddenly appear or change speed.
Case 2: Continue to Track Subjects, Ignoring Possible Obstacles Default • Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: –1 • Accel./decel. tracking: 0 Setting to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move across AF points, or if the subject strays from AF points. Effective if you prefer the focus not to switch to nonsubjects or the background.
Case 3: Instantly Focus on Subjects Suddenly Entering AF Points Default • Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1 • Accel./decel. tracking: +1 Setting to focus on a series of subjects at different distances in the AF points, one after another. Focus switches to any new subject that appears in front of the target subject. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.
Case 4: For Subjects That Accelerate or Decelerate Quickly Default • Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: 0 • Accel./decel. tracking: +1 Setting to keep tracking and focusing on subjects even if they suddenly change speed. Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Note Try setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] to keep up with subjects that change speed significantly from moment to moment ( ).
Case A: Tracking Automatically Adapts to Subject Movement Useful when you prefer to shoot with parameters set automatically, based on how subjects change. Tracking sensitivity and acceleration/deceleration tracking are set automatically.
Parameters Tracking sensitivity Setting for Servo AF subject-tracking sensitivity in response to non-subjects moving across AF points or subjects straying from AF points. 0 Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general. Locked on: –2 / Locked on: –1 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move across AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The –2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target subject longer than the –1 setting.
Accel./decel. tracking Setting for AI Servo AF/Servo AF subject-tracking sensitivity in response to sudden, significant changes in speed, as when subjects suddenly start or stop moving. 0 Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed). –2 / –1 Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed). Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due to slight subject movement or an obstruction in front of the subject.
Adjusting Case Parameters You can manually adjust the parameters ((1) Tracking sensitivity and (2) Acceleration/ deceleration tracking) for cases 1 to 4. 1. Select a case. Turn the < 2. Press the < > dial to select the number of a case to adjust. > button. The selected parameter is outlined in purple. 3. Select a parameter to adjust.
4. Make the adjustment. Default settings are indicated by a light gray [ ] icon. To confirm the adjustment, press < >. To return to the screen in step 1, press the < > button. Note To restore default parameter settings for (1) and (2) to each case, press the > button in step 2, then press the < > button. < You can also register (1) and (2) parameter settings to My Menu ( ). This enables you to adjust settings for the selected case.
Customizing AF Functions [AF4] [AF5] [AF3] (In Movie Recording) You can configure AF functions in detail to suit your shooting style or subject. [ 4] Lens electronic MF For EF lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF. [ ] Disable after One-Shot After the AF operation, manual focusing adjustment is disabled.
[ ] One-Shot→enabled (magnify) You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep holding down the shutter button halfway. You can magnify the area in focus and adjust the focus manually by turning the lens focusing ring. [ ] Disable in AF mode Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens's focus mode switch is set to < >.
One-Shot AF release prior. You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for One-Shot AF (except when shooting with Touch Shutter). [ ] Focus The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image. [ ] Release Prioritizes shutter release over focus. Useful when capturing the decisive moment is most important. Note that the camera shoots whether or not the subject is in focus.
Switching tracked subjects You can specify how easily the camera switches AF points to track subjects. Applies to Face+Tracking, Zone AF, or Large Zone AF (vertical or horizontal) AF methods. • Disable Tracks the subject initially determined for AF, to the extent possible. • Enable (slow) Tracks the main subject initially determined for AF, to the extent possible. Switches to other subjects if the camera can no longer determine if the tracked subject is the main subject.
Lens drive when AF impossible You can specify lens operation that applies when autofocusing on a subject is not possible. [ ] Continue focus search If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise focus. [ ] Stop focus search If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search drive.
Limit AF methods You can limit the AF methods available to those that you will use. Select AF methods and press < > to add a checkmark [ ] and make them available. Select [OK] to register the setting. For details on AF methods, see AF Method. Caution The [ ] mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF]. Note An asterisk “*” to the right of [ setting has been modified.
AF method selection control You can set how AF method selection methods are switched. [ ] →M-Fn button Press the < method. [ ] > button, then the < > button. Each press switches the AF →Main Dial Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to switch the AF method. Note When [ →Main Dial] is set, use < > to move the AF point horizontally.
Orientation linked AF point You can set separate AF points or Zone AF frames to use in vertical and horizontal shooting. [ ] Same for both vert/horiz The same AF points or Zone AF frames are used in both vertical and horizontal shooting. [ ] Separate AF pts: Pt only Separate AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for each camera orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical with the camera grip down).
[ 5] Initial Servo AF pt for You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is set to [ +Tracking]. Initial AF pt set for Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation is set to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [ +Tracking]. AF pt set for Servo AF starts from the AF point that was set manually before switching from Spot AF, 1-point AF, or Expand AF area (manual selection ) or Expand AF area (manual selection: surround) to [Auto selection AF] or [ +Tracking].
Focus ring rotation You can reverse the direction that the focusing ring of RF lens is rotated to adjust settings. [ ] Normal [ ] Reverse direction RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity You can set the sensitivity of the RF lens focusing ring. [ ] Varies with rotation speed Focusing ring sensitivity varies depending on rotation speed. [ ] Linked to rotation degree The focal position is adjusted based on the amount of rotation, regardless of the rotation speed.
sensitivity- AF pt select You can adjust Multi-controller sensitivity, which applies to AF point positioning.
[AF3] (In Movie Recording) Movie Servo AF speed This function is available when [ : Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable]. You can set the AF speed and operating conditions for Movie Servo AF. The function is enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition during movie recording.
Note Operation when inactive is equivalent to when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)]. An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the default setting has been modified. Movie Servo AF track sens. You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.
Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. 1. Press the < > button ( ). With an image displayed on the screen, press the < 2. Select the drive mode item. Turn the < > dial to select the drive mode item. 427 > button.
3. Select the drive mode. Turn the < > dial to make a selection. [ ] Single shooting When you hold down the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken. [ ] High-speed continuous shooting + When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 12 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down. [ ] High-speed continuous shooting When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 8.0 shots/sec.
Caution Approx. 12 shots/sec. continuous shooting speed with [ following conditions. • Room temperature (23°C/73°F) ] is available under the • Battery level (LP-E6NH): At least approx. 50% (or using an optional Battery Grip BG-R10, a battery level of at least approx. 50% with two LP-E6NH) • Shutter speed: 1/1000 sec. or faster • Wi-Fi connection: Not connected • Flicker reduction: None • Set to maximum aperture, when using RF lenses or [ lenses* * For details on EF lenses compatible with [ Shots/Sec.
Using the Self-Timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. 1. Press the < > button ( ). With an image displayed on the screen, press the < 2. Select the drive mode item. Turn the < 3. > dial to select the drive mode item. Select the self-timer. Turn the < > dial to select the self-timer. : Shoot in 10 sec. : Shoot in 2 sec. 430 > button.
4. Take the picture. Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely. To check operation, look at the self-timer lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the countdown in seconds on the screen. Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec. before the picture is taken. Note [ ] is used to start shooting without touching the camera (to avoid camera shake) when it is mounted on a tripod for shots such as still lifes or long exposures, for example.
Remote Control Shooting Remote Controller RC-6 Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 Remote Switch RS-60E3 For remote control shooting, you can use Remote Controller RC-6, Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, or Remote Switch RS-60E3 (infrared, Bluetooth, and wired connections, respectively; sold separately). Remote Controller RC-6 You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the front of the camera. You can either shoot immediately or with a 2-sec. delay. 1. Press the < > button ( ).
2. Select the self-timer/remote control. Turn the < > dial to select the drive mode item, then turn the < > dial to select [ ] or [ ]. 3. Press the release (transmit) button on the remote controller. Point the remote controller toward the camera's remote control sensor (1), then press the release (transmit) button. Autofocusing is performed when the focus mode switch is set to < >. The remote control lamp lights up, and the camera shoots.
Caution Infrared remote controllers such as the RC-6 cannot be used for remote control shooting when the camera is paired via Bluetooth with a smartphone or wireless remote control. Fluorescent or LED lighting may trigger accidental shutter release. Try to keep the camera away from these light sources. Operating a TV remote control or similar device aimed at the camera may trigger accidental shutter release. Firing flash units of other cameras near the camera may trigger accidental shutter release.
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. After pairing the camera and BR-E1 ( ), set the drive mode to [ ] or [ ] for still photo shooting ( ). For movie recording, set [ : Remote control] to [Enable]. For operating instructions, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual. Note RC-6 and BR-E1 Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control shooting. RC-6 and BR-E1 can also be used for movie recording ( ).
Remote Switch RS-60E3 Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely over a wired connection. For operating instructions, refer to the RS-60E3 instruction manual. 1. Open the terminal cover. 2. Connect the plug to the remote control terminal.
Playback This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings on the playback ([ ]) tab. Caution Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or renamed on a computer.
• Playback Grid • Movie Play Count • HDMI HDR Output 438
Tab Menus: Playback Playback 1 (1) Protect images (2) Erase images (3) Rotate stills (4) Change mov rotate info (5) Rating (6) Image copy Playback 2 (1) Print order (2) Photobook Set-up 439
Playback 3 (1) RAW image processing (2) Resize (3) Cropping (4) HEIF→JPEG conversion Caution [ : RAW image processing] and [ displayed in < > mode.
Playback 5 (1) Playback information display (2) Highlight alert (3) AF point disp.
Image Playback Single-Image Display Shooting Information Display Touch Playback Single-Image Display 1. Switch to playback. Press the < > button. The last image captured or played back is displayed.
2. Browse images. To play back images starting with your most recent shot, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise. Each time you press the < > button, the display will change. No information Basic information display Shooting information display 3. Exit image playback. Press the < standby.
Note Lines indicating the image area are shown on RAW images captured with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] ( ). If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ), only the filtered images will be displayed.
Shooting Information Display With the shooting information screen displayed ( ), you can press < > up or down to : Playback view other information. You can also customize the information displayed, in [ information display] ( ).
Touch Playback The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First, press the < > button to prepare for touch playback.
Magnified view Note You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
Magnified Image Display Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position You can magnify display of your captured images. 1. Magnify the image. Turn the < > dial clockwise. The magnified view will appear. The position of the magnified area (1) is displayed in the lower right of the screen, along with [ ]. To magnify images, turn the < > dial clockwise. To reduce magnification, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. For index display ( ), keep turning the dial.
2. Scroll the image. Use < > to scroll around the magnified image. Press the < > or < > button to exit magnified view. Note To switch to other images while maintaining magnified view, turn the < Magnification is not available for movies. 449 > dial.
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position You can set the initial magnification ratio and magnified position by selecting [ Magnificatn (apx)]. : 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center) The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected magnification ratio. Actual size (from selected pt) The recorded image's pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus.
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) 1. Switch to the index display. During image playback, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame. Turning the < > dial further counterclockwise will switch the display from 9 to 36 to 100 images. Turning the dial clockwise cycles through 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
2. Browse images. Use < > or the < selection. > dial to move the orange frame for image Press < > in the index display to display the selected image in the single-image display.
Movie Playback 1. Switch to playback. Press the < 2. > button. Select a movie. Turn the < > dial to select a movie to play. In single-image display, the [ the screen indicates a movie. ] icon displayed in the upper left of In index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie. Movies cannot be played back from index display, so press < > to switch to single-image display.
3. In the single-image display, press < 4. Press < >. > to play back the movie. The movie will start playing back. You can pause playback and display the movie playback panel by >. Press it again to resume the playback. pressing < Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume (even during playback).
Movie playback panel Item Playback Operations Playback Pressing < Slow motion Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < > dial. The slow motion speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen. Skip backward Skips backward approx. 4 sec. each time you press < Previous frame Next frame Skip forward > toggles between playback and stop. Displays the previous frame each time you press < < >. >. Holding > down will rewind the movie. Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press < < >.
Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments. 1. In single-image display, press < 2. On the movie playback panel, select [ 457 >. ].
3. Specify the part to be edited out. Select either [ ] (Cut beginning) or [ ] (Cut end). Press < > left or right to go back or forward one frame. Keep pressing the multi-controller to fast rewind or fast forward frames. Each turn of the < > dial goes back or forward one frame. After deciding which part to edit out, press < >. The portion indicated by a line at the bottom of the screen will remain. 4. Check the edited movie. Select [ ] to play back the edited movie.
5. Save. Select [ ] (1). The save screen will appear. To save it as a new file, select [New file], or to save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [Overwrite]. Select [ ] (2) to save a compressed version of the file. 4K movies are converted to Full HD movies before compression. On the confirmation screen, select [OK] to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen. Caution Because editing is performed in approx. 1 sec.
4K Movie Frame Grab From 4K movies, you can select individual frames to save as JPEG or HEIF still images. This function is called “Frame Grab.” 1. Select a 4K movie. Turn the < > dial to select a 4K quality movie. On the shooting information screen ( [ ] icons. In index display, press < 2. ), 4K movies are labeled with > to switch to single-image display. In the single-image display, press < >. The movie playback panel will appear. 3. Select a frame to grab.
4. Select [ 5. Save. ]. Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image. Frame grabs from HDR movie files are saved as HEIF images. Check the destination folder and image file number. 6. Select the image to display. Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image]. Caution Frame grabbing is not possible from the following 4K movies.
Playback on a TV Set By connecting the camera to a television with a commercially available HDMI cable, you can play back the captured still photos and movies on the television. If the image does not appear on the TV screen, confirm that [ : Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your television). 1. Connect the HDMI cable to the camera. Insert the HDMI cable in the camera's < 2. > terminal. Connect the HDMI cable to the television.
5. Press the < > button. Images are now displayed on the television, with nothing displayed on the camera screen. The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution matching the connected television. Caution Adjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera. Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off the camera and television.
Protecting Images Protecting Individual Images via the Menu Specifying the Range of Images to Protect Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect important images from being accidentally erased. Caution If you format the card ( ), the protected images will also be erased. Note Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
2. Select [Select images]. 3. Select the image to protect. Turn the < 4. > dial to select an image to protect. Protect the image. Press < > to protect the selected image, after which it will be labeled with a [ ] icon (1) at the top of the screen. To cancel protection and clear the [ ] icon, press < > again. To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4. Note You can protect individual images during playback by pressing the < button when [ : btn function] is assigned to [Protect] ( ).
Specifying the Range of Images to Protect While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once. 1. Select [Select range]. Select [Select range] in [ 2. : Protect images]. Specify the range of images. Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). The images in the specified range will be protected and the [ ] icon will appear.
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected. : Protect To cancel protection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images on card]. If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all found].
Erasing Images Erasing Images Individually Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together Specifying the Range of Images to Erase Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can either select and erase unnecessary images individually or erase them in one batch. Protected images ( ) will not be erased. Caution Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them.
4. Erase the images. JPEG/HEIF/RAW images or movies Select [Erase]. RAW+JPEG/RAW+HEIF images Select an option. Note You can erase individual images during playback by pressing the < when [ : btn function] is assigned to [Erase images] ( ).
Selecting ([ ]) Multiple Images to Erase Together By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Select and erase images]. 3. Select an image. : Erase images]. Turn the < > dial to select an image to erase, then press < To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3. 470 >.
4. Erase the images. Press the < > button, then press [OK].
Specifying the Range of Images to Erase While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once. 1. Select [Select range]. Select [Select range] in [ 2. : Erase images]. Specify the range of images. Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images.
4. Erase the images. Select [OK].
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [ all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased. : Erase images], If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( display will change to [All found images]. ), the • If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be erased.
Rotating Still Photos You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation. 1. Select [ 2. Select an image to rotate. : Rotate stills]. Turn the < > dial to select the image.
3. Rotate the image. Each time you press < 90°→270°→0°. >, the image will rotate clockwise as follows: To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3. Note If you set [ : Auto rotate] to [On ] ( ) before taking pictures, you need not rotate the image with this function. If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image ]. playback, set [ : Auto rotate] to [On Movies cannot be rotated.
Changing Movie Orientation Information You can manually edit movie playback orientation information (which determines which side is up). 1. Select [ 2. Select a movie. : Change mov rotate info]. Turn the < change.
3. Change the orientation information. As you watch the camera and icon in the upper left of the screen, press < > to specify which side is up. Each press of < > edits the movie rotation information as follows: [ ] → [ ] → [ ]. Caution Movies are played horizontally on the camera and via HDMI video output, rotate info] setting ( ). regardless of the [ : Add Movie orientation information of movies recorded with other cameras cannot be edited with this camera.
Rating Images Rating Individual Images With the < > Button Rating Individual Images via the Menu Rating by Specifying the Range Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 ( / / / / ). This function is called rating. * Rating images can help you organize them. Rating Individual Images With the < 1. Select the image to be rated. Press the < Turn the < 2. > Button > button to switch to image playback. > dial to select the image to be rated. Rate the image.
Note In the detailed settings for [Rating] in [ rating to apply.
Rating Individual Images via the Menu 1. Select [ 2. Select [Select images]. 3. Select the image to be rated. : Rating]. Turn the < > dial to select the image to be rated.
4. Rate the image. Press < >, and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the screen shown above. Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then press < >. When you append a rating mark to the image, the number beside the set rating will increase by one. To rate another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Rating by Specifying the Range While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once. 1. Select [Select range]. Select [Select range] in [ 2. : Rating]. Specify the range of images. Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. 3. Press the < > button.
4. Rate the images. Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK]. All the images in the specified range will be rated (same rating) at once.
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once. Under [ : Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be rated. Turn the < > dial to select a rating, then select [OK]. When you are not rating images or canceling the rating, select [ ]. If the search conditions are set with [ : Set image search conditions] ( display will change to [All found images].
Note Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have that rating. With [ : Set image search conditions] and [ : Image jump w/ ], you can display only the images given a specific rating.
Copying Images Copying Individual Images Copying a Range of Images Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can copy the images on one card to the other card to save duplicates. All images in a folder or on a card can also be copied at the same time. Caution If the target folder or card already has an image with the same file number, [Skip image and continue], [Replace existing image], and [Cancel copy] are displayed. Select a copying method, then press < >.
Copying Individual Images 1. Select [ 2. Select [Sel.Image]. : Image copy]. Check the source and target card numbers and the free space on the target card. Select [Sel.Image], then press < 488 >.
3. Select the folder. (1) Number of images in folder (2) Lowest file number (3) Folder name (4) Highest file number Select the source folder, then press < >. When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the screen. 4. Select an image to copy. (1) Total images selected Turn the < > dial to select an image to copy, then press < To select another image to copy, repeat step 4. 489 >.
5. Press the < 6. Select [OK]. > button. Check the target card, then select [OK]. 7. Select the target folder. Select the folder to copy the image to, then press < To create a new folder, select [Create folder]. 490 >.
8. Select [OK]. Check the information about the source and target card, then select [OK]. Results are displayed after copying is finished. Select [OK] to return to the screen in step 2.
Copying a Range of Images You can copy all specified images at once by selecting the first and last images in a range as you look at images in the index display. 1. Select [Range]. 2. Select the folder. Select the source folder, then press < >. When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the screen.
3. Specify the range of images. Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. To select another image to copy, repeat step 3.
Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once. Selecting [Sel. ] or [All images] in [ : Image copy] copies all the images it contains.
Print Ordering (DPOF) Print Options Selection of Images for Printing DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher. You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing.
3. Set the options as desired. Set [Print type], [Date], and [File No.] options. Print type Date File No. 4. On Off On Off Standard Prints one image on one sheet. Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet. Both Prints both the standard and index prints. [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image. [On] imprints the file number. Exit the setting. Press the < > button. Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to specify the images to be printed.
Caution If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting ( ), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case, resize the image ( ), then print the index print. Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer. With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the same time.
Selecting Images for Printing Sel.Image Select and specify the images individually. Press the < > button to save the print order to the card. Standard/Both (1) Quantity (2) Total images selected Press < > to print a copy of the displayed image. By turning the < set a print quantity of up to 99 copies. > dial, you can Index (3) Checkmark (4) Index icon Press < print. > to add a checkmark [ ] to the box.
Multiple Select range Select [Select range] in [Multiple]. Selecting the first and last images of the range marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [ ], and one copy of each image will be specified for printing. All images in a folder Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
Photobook Set-up Specifying Individual Images via the Menu Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook Specifying All Images in a Folder or Card You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer, the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online. Specifying Individual Images via the Menu 1. Select [ 2. Select [Select images].
3. Select the image to be specified. Use the < > dial to select the image to be specified for a photobook, then press < >. To select other images to be specified for a photobook, repeat step 3.
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range (start point to end point) of images to be specified for a photobook at once. 1. Select [Multiple]. Select [Multiple] in [ 2. : Photobook Set-up]. Select [Select range].
3. Specify the range of images. Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images.
Specifying All Images in a Folder or Card You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a photobook. All images in the folder or on the card are specified for the photobook when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in the [Multiple] option for [ : Photobook Setup]. To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on card].
RAW Image Processing Magnified View Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios RAW Image Processing Options You can process or images with the camera to create JPEG or HEIF images. RAW images are not affected, so different conditions can be applied to create JPEG or HEIF images. You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.
2. Select an option, then select images. You can select multiple images to process at once. Select images Turn the < Press the < > dial to select images to process, then press < >. > button. Select range Select the first image (start point). Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [ ] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. Press the < > button. To process other images, repeat this step.
3. Set the desired processing conditions. Use shot settings Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture. Images captured with [ : HDR PQ settings] set to [Enable] are processed to create HEIFs, and images captured with this function set to [Disable] are processed to create JPEGs. Set up processing→JPEG/Set up processing→HEIF Use < > to select an item. Turn the < Press < > or < > dial to switch the setting. > to access the function setting screen.
4. Save. When using [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing→HEIF], select [ ] (Save). Read the message and select [OK]. To process other images, select [Yes] and repeat steps 2–4. 5. Select the image to display. Select [Original image] or [Processed img.]. Your selected image is displayed. Magnified view You can magnify images displayed for [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing→HEIF] by pressing the < > button. The magnification ratio varies depending on the [Image quality] setting.
Caution Results of processing with [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] are only applied in magnified view. Results are not applied in normal display.
Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios JPEG or HEIF images at the specified aspect ratio are created when you process RAW images shot with [ : Cropping/aspect ratio] ( ) set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].
RAW Image Processing Options Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments. White balance ( ) You can select the white balance. Selecting [ ] enables you to select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [ ], you can set the color temperature. Picture Style ( ) You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters.
Image quality ( ) You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG or HEIF image. Color space ( ) You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set. *[ selection.
• Diffraction correction ( ) The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image ( ). Caution Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software). If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be intensified with the effects of adjustment.
Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images You can resize a JPEG or HEIF image to reduce the pixel count and save it as a new image. Resizing is available for , , or JPEGs or HEIFs (sizes except ), including those captured in RAW+JPEG and RAW+HEIF shooting. images and RAW images or movies cannot be resized. 1. Select [ 2. Select an image. : Resize]. Turn the < > dial to select the image to resize.
3. Select the desired image size. Press < > to display the image sizes. Select the desired image size (1). 4. Save. Select [OK] to save the resized image. Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK]. To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.
Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping is available for JPEG or HEIF images. RAW images and frame-grab images from 4K movies cannot be cropped. 1. Select [ 2. Select an image. : Cropping]. Turn the < Press < > dial to select the image to crop. > to display the cropping frame.
3. Set the cropping frame. The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped. Resizing the cropping frame size Turn the < > dial to resize the cropping frame size. The smaller the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look. Correcting tilt You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the < > dial to select [ ], >. While checking tilt relative to the grid, turn the < > then press < dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right arrow (in 0.
5. Save. Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. Select [OK] to save the cropped image. Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK]. To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to 5. Caution The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the angle set for tilt correction. Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized. AF point display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended to the cropped images.
Converting HEIF to JPEG You can convert HEIF images captured in HDR shooting and save them as JPEG images. 1. Select [ 2. Select an image. : HEIF→JPEG conversion]. Turn the < Press < > dial to select an HEIF image to convert to JPEG. > to convert to JPEG.
3. Save. Select [OK] to save the JPEG image. • Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK]. • To convert another image, repeat steps 2 and 3. Note Some scenes may look different after conversion (if original and converted images are compared). Conversion is not available for cropped images, or for frame-grab images from 4K movies.
Slide Show You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show. 1. Specify the images to be played back. To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2. If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show, filter the images with [ : Set image search conditions] ( ). 2. Select [ : Slide show].
3. Set the playback as desired. Select [Set up]. Set the [Display time] and [Repeat] (repeated playback) settings for the still photos. After completing the settings, press the < Display time Repeat 522 > button.
4. Start the slide show. Select [Start]. After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start. 5. Exit the slide show. To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the < > button. Note To pause the slide show, press < >. During pause, [ ] will be displayed in the > again to resume the slide show. upper left of the screen. Press < During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the < > button to switch the display format ( ).
Setting Image Search Conditions Clearing the Search Conditions You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. You can also protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other operations to filtered images. 1. Select [ : Set image search conditions].
2. Set the search conditions. Turn the < > dial to select an option. Turn the < > dial to set the option. A checkmark [ ] (1) is appended to the left of the option. (Specified as the search condition.) If you select the option and press the < > button, the checkmark [ ] will be removed (which cancels the search condition). Option Description Rating Displays images with the selected (rating) condition. Date Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
3. Apply the search conditions. Press < > and read the message displayed. Select [OK]. The search condition is applied. 4. Display the found images. Press the < > button. Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played back. When the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer yellow frame (2). Caution If no images match the search conditions, < 526 > cannot be pressed in step 3.
Note Search conditions may be cleared after operations involving camera power or card changes and editing, adding, or erasing images. Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Set image search conditions] screen is displayed. Clearing the Search Conditions Access the screen in step 2, then press the < 527 > button to clear all the search conditions.
Browsing Images with the Main Dial In single-image display, you can turn the < backward according to the jump method set. 1. Select [ 2. Select the jump method. > dial to jump through the images forward or : Image jump w/ ]. Note With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the < > dial to select the number of images to jump by. With [Display by image rating], turn the < > dial to select the rating ( ). Selecting will show all rated images as you browse.
3. Browse by jumping. (1) Jump method (2) Playback position Press the < > button. In single-image display, turn the < > dial. You can browse by the jump method set.
Switching the Main Dial and Quick Control Dial 2 You can switch the functions assigned to these dials, as used on the image playback screen. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Switch / ]. [Disable] Image jump Magnify/Index view [Enable] Magnify/Index view Image jump Note Corresponding icons in menus and on screens such as the Quick Control and Magnify/Reduce screen are changed accordingly.
Rate Button Function You can assign image rating, protection, or erasure to the < 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. [ : > button. btn function]. ] Rating Assigns rating to the < > button. (Default setting.) You can press the < > button to select the rating to use. During playback, you can rate images or clear ratings by pressing the < > button. [ ] Protect Assigns protection to the < > button. During playback, you can protect images or clear protection by pressing the < > button.
Customizing Playback Information Display Histogram You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during image playback. 1. Select [ 2. Add a checkmark [ : Playback information display]. ] next to the number of screens to display. Select numbers with the < Press < > dial. > to add a checkmark [ ]. Repeat these steps to add a checkmark [ screen to display, then select [OK].
Histogram The histograms show signal levels across the tonal range. Brightness display (for checking the general exposure level and overall gradation) and RGB display (for checking saturation and gradation of red, green, and blue) are available. You can switch the histogram displayed by pressing the < > button when [ ] is displayed in the lower left of the [ : Playback information display] screen.
[Brightness] display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level, with the horizontal axis indicating the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image, and the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the image.
[RGB] display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color's brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue), with the horizontal axis indicating the color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color, and the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color.
Displaying the Highlight Alert You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback screen. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : Highlight alert].
AF Point Display You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. : AF point disp.].
Playback Grid You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on the playback screen. This function is convenient for checking the image's vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Playback grid].
Movie Play Count You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen. 1. Select [ : Movie play count].
2. Select an option. Rec time Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback. Time code Displays the time code during movie playback. Note Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except for High Frame Rate movies set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting. The [Movie play count] setting in [ : Time code] is linked to the [ : Movie play count], so that these settings always match. The “frame” count is not displayed during movie recording or playback.
HDMI HDR Output You can view RAW or HEIF images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR TV. 1. Select [ 2. Select [On]. : HDMI HDR output]. Note Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual. Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected. On HDR TVs, some information may not be displayed. Quick Control RAW processing of displayed images is recommended if you will process RAW images while viewing HDMI HDR output.
Wireless Features This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a smartphone, computer, FTP server, or Web service wirelessly via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi and send images, as well as how to use a wireless remote control or GPS device. Caution Important Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
Tab Menus: Wireless Features Wireless features 1 (1) Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection (2) Airplane mode (3) Wi-Fi settings (4) Bluetooth settings (5) Nickname (6) GPS device settings (7) Image transfer Wireless features 2 (1) Reset communication settings 543
Caution Wireless communication is not available while the camera is connected via an interface cable to a computer or other device. Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi. The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in it (except for [ ], [ ], or [ ]).
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection 1. Select [ 2. Select an option for the camera to connect to. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. Connect to smartphone ( ) Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in this manual).
Upload to Web service ( ) Images can be sent automatically to the image.canon cloud service for Canon customers after you complete member registration (free of charge). Original files of images sent to image.canon are retained for 30 days, without storage limitations, and can be downloaded to computers or transferred to other Web services. Connect to Wireless Remote ( ) This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
Connecting to a Smartphone Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi Camera Connect Functions Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off Canceling the Pairing Wi-Fi Connection without Using Bluetooth Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera Terminating Wi-Fi Connections Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones You can do the following after
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen. Note To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points.
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed. Use the latest version of the smartphone OS. Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the camera (1) 1. Select [ 2. Select [Enable]. 3. Select [ : Wi-Fi settings]. : Bluetooth settings].
4. Select [Enable]. 5. Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 6. Select [ Connect to smartphone].
7. Select [Add a device to connect to]. 8. Select an option. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App Store and install Camera Connect.
9. Select [Pair via Bluetooth]. Press < > to start pairing. To pair with a different smartphone after pairing with one initially, select [OK] on the screen shown above.
Steps on the smartphone (1) 10. Start Camera Connect. 11. Tap the camera for pairing. In Android, go to Steps on the camera (2). 12. Tap [Pair] (iOS only).
Steps on the camera (2) 13. Select [OK]. 14. Press the < > button. Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth. A Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen.
Caution The camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via Bluetooth. To switch to a different smartphone for the Bluetooth connection, see Changing or Deleting Connection Settings. Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera's auto power off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use the camera. Troubleshooting pairing Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will prevent it from pairing with this camera.
Steps on the smartphone (2) 15. Tap a Camera Connect function. In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. For the Camera Connect functions, see Camera Connect Functions. When a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected function will appear. [ Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera screen. The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on the main Camera Connect screen. The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now complete.
[ Wi-Fi on] screen Disconnect,exit Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. You can check the settings. Error details When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error.
Camera Connect Functions Images on camera Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated. Images can be saved on a smartphone. Remote live view shooting Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone. Auto transfer Enables camera and app setting adjustment for automatic transfer of your shots ( ). Bluetooth remote controller Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via Bluetooth. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off Even when the camera power switch is set to < >, as long as it is paired to a smartphone via Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi and browse images on the camera or perform other operations. If you prefer not to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera when it is off, either set [Airplane mode] to [On] ( ) or set [Bluetooth settings] to [Disable].
Canceling the Pairing Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows. 1. Select [ 2. Select [ Connect to smartphone]. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. If the history ( dial or < >. 3. ) is displayed, switch screens with the < Select [Edit/delete device].
4. Select the smartphone to cancel pairing with. Smartphones currently paired with the camera are labeled [ ]. 5. Select [Delete connection information]. 6. Select [OK]. 7. Clear the camera information on the smartphone. In the smartphone's Bluetooth setting menu, clear the camera information registered on the smartphone.
Wi-Fi Connection without Using Bluetooth Steps on the camera (1) 1. Set Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. See steps 1–2 in Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi. 2. Select [ 3. Select [ Connect to smartphone]. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. If the history ( dial or < >.
4. Select [Add a device to connect to]. 5. Select an option. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. 6. Select [Connect via Wi-Fi].
7. Check the SSID (network name) and password. Check the SSID (1) and Password (2) displayed on the camera screen. Note By selecting [Switch network] in step 7, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point ( ).
Steps on the smartphone 8. Operate the smartphone to establish a Wi-Fi connection. Smartphone's screen (sample) Activate the smartphone's Wi-Fi function, then tap the SSID (network name) checked in step 7 in Steps on the camera (1). For the password, enter the password checked in step 7 in Steps on the camera (1). 9. Start Camera Connect and tap the camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.
Steps on the camera (2) 10. Select [OK]. To specify viewable images, press the < > button. Configure as described in Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones, starting in step 5. The main window of Camera Connect will be displayed on the smartphone. The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is now complete. Operate the camera using Camera Connect ( ). For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see Terminating Wi-Fi Connections. To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following these steps, make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi. 1. Select [ 2. Select [Send to smartphone after shot]. 3. Set [Auto send] to [Enable]. : Wi-Fi settings].
4. Set [Size to send]. 5. Take the picture.
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi. 1. Switch to playback. 2. Press the < 3. Select [ > button. Send images to smartphone]. If you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is displayed, and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi connection. 4. Select sending options and send the images.
(1) Sending images individually 1. Select an image to send. Use the < > dial to select an image to send, then press < >. You can turn the < > dial counterclockwise to select the image using the index display. 2. Select [Send img shown]. In [Size to send], you can select the image sending size. When sending movies, you can select the image quality of movies to send in [Quality to send].
(2) Sending multiple selected images 1. Press < 2. Select [Send selected]. >.
3. Select images to send. Use the < > dial to select images to send, then press < >. You can turn the < > dial counterclockwise to switch to select the images from 3-image display. To return to single-image display, turn the < > dial clockwise. After selecting the images to send, press the < 573 > button.
4. Select [Size to send]. On the displayed screen, select an image size. When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send]. 5. Select [Send].
(3) Sending a specified range of images 1. Press < 2. Select [Send range]. 3. Specify the range of images. >. Select the first image (start point). Select the last image (end point). To cancel the selection, repeat this step. To change the number of images in index display, turn the < dial.
4. Confirm the range. Press the < 5. > button. Select [Size to send]. On the displayed screen, select an image size. When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send]. 6. Select [Send].
(4) Sending all images on the card 1. Press < 2. Select [Send all card]. >.
3. Select [Size to send]. On the displayed screen, select an image size. When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send]. 4. Select [Send].
(5) Sending images that match the search conditions Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image search conditions] at once. For details on [Set image search conditions], see Setting Image Search Conditions. 1. Press < 2. Select [Send all found]. >.
3. Select [Size to send]. On the displayed screen, select an image size. When sending movies, select the image quality in [Quality to send]. 4. Select [Send].
Ending image transfer Sending images from the camera when paired via Bluetooth (Android devices only) Press the < > button on the image transfer screen. Select [OK] to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi connection. Sending images from the camera over a Wi-Fi connection Press the < > button on the image transfer screen. To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see Terminating Wi-Fi Connections.
Note You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer. You can select up to 999 files at a time. With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone's power saving function is recommended. Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that time. Note that size still photos are not reduced. Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time. Note that and movies are not reduced.
Terminating Wi-Fi Connections Perform either of the following operations. On the Camera Connect screen, tap [ ]. On the [ Wi-Fi on] screen, select [Disconnect,exit]. If the [ Wi-Fi on] screen is not displayed, select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. Select [Disconnect,exit], then select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated. 1. Select [ 2. Select [ Connect to smartphone]. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. If the history ( dial or < >. 3. ) is displayed, switch screens with the < Select [Edit/delete device].
4. Select a smartphone. Select the name of the smartphone on which you want to make the images viewable. 5. Select [Viewable imgs].
6. Select an option. Select [OK] to access the setting screen. [All images] All images stored on the card become viewable. [Images from past days] Specify viewable images on the shooting-date basis. Images shot up to nine days ago can be specified. When [Images shot in past days] is selected, images shot up to the specified number of days before the current date become viewable. Use the [ ] [ ] keys to specify the number of days, then press < > to confirm the selection.
[Select by rating] Specify viewable images depending on whether a rating is appended (or not appended) or by the type of rating. Once you select the type of rating, the viewable images are set. [File number range] (Select range) Select the first and last images from images arranged by the file number to specify the viewable images. 1.Press < > to display the image selection screen. To select images, use the < > dial or other controls.
Caution If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting, the following will occur. • Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue. • Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end. With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are unavailable. In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower. Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release timing may be delayed.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility Direct Transfer Creating and Registering Captions This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and perform camera operations using EOS Utility (EOS software). Install the latest version of EOS Utility on the computer before setting up a Wi-Fi connection. For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
3. Select [ Remote control (EOS Utility)]. If the history ( >. dial or < ) is displayed, switch screens with the < 4. Select [Add a device to connect to]. 5. Check the SSID (network name) and password. >< > Check the SSID (1) and password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
Steps on the computer (1) 6. Select the SSID, then enter the password. Computer's screen (sample) On the computer's network setting screen, select the SSID checked in step 5 in Steps on the camera (1). For the password, enter the password checked in step 5 in Steps on the camera (1).
Steps on the camera (2) 7. Select [OK]. The following message is displayed. “******” represents the last six digits of the MAC address of the camera to be connected. Steps on the computer (2) 8. Start EOS Utility. 9. In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over Wi-Fi/LAN]. If a firewall-related message is displayed, select [Yes].
10. Click [Connect]. Select the camera to connect to, then click [Connect]. Steps on the camera (3) 11. Establish a Wi-Fi connection. Select [OK].
[ Wi-Fi on] screen Disconnect,exit Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. You can check the settings. Error details When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error. The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete. Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer. To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see Reconnecting via Wi-Fi. Caution If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting, the following will occur.
Direct Transfer With the camera connected to EOS Utility and the main EOS Utility window displayed, you can use the camera to transfer images to computer. Selecting images to transfer 1. Select [ 2. Select [Image sel./transfer]. 3. Select [Direct transfer]. : Image transfer].
4. Select [Sel.Image]. 5. Select images to transfer. Use the < > dial to select an image to transfer, then press < >. Use the < > dial to add a [ ] in the upper left of the screen, then >. press < You can turn the < > dial counterclockwise to switch to selecting images from 3-image display. To return to single-image display, turn the < > dial clockwise. To select other images to transfer, repeat step 5. After image selection, press the < > button. 6. Select [Direct transfer].
7. Select [OK]. The selected images are transferred to the computer.
Selecting multiple images Multiple images can be transferred at once after you choose a selection method. 1. Access the [Image sel./transfer] screen. Follow steps 1–3 in Selecting Images to Transfer. 2. Select [Multiple]. 3. Select a selection method to use. Select range • Select [Select range]. Selecting the first and last images of the range marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [ ], and one copy of each image will be sent.
In a folder • Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] selects all images in the selected folder for which transfer failed. • Selecting [Folder images not transfer'd] selects all unsent images in the selected folder. • Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] clears the transfer history of images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Folder images not transfer'd] and transfer all images in the folder again.
5. Select [OK]. The selected images are transferred to the computer.
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images For RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images, you can specify which image to transfer. 1. Select [ 2. Select the type of images to transfer. : Image transfer].
RAW+JPEG transfer • Select [RAW+JPEG transfer], then select [JPEG only], [RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG]. RAW+HEIF transfer • Select [RAW+HEIF transfer], then select [HEIF only], [RAW only], or [RAW+HEIF]. Caution Some menu items are not available during image transfer. Note This setting is linked to [RAW+JPEG transfer] and [RAW+HEIF transfer] settings on the [Transfer type/size] screen ( ).
Creating and Registering Captions You can create captions and register them on the camera to use them as described in Adding a Caption Before Transfer. 1. Start EOS Utility and select [Camera settings]. 2. Select [WFT Captions]. 3. Enter the caption or captions. Enter up to 31 characters (in ASCII format). To acquire caption data stored on the camera, select [Load settings].
4. Set the captions on the camera. Select [Apply to camera] to set your new captions on the camera.
Sending Images to a Web Service This section describes how to send images to image.canon. Registering Image.Canon and Setting Up Auto Send You can register image.canon on the camera and prepare to send your shots automatically. A computer or smartphone with a browser and internet connection is required. You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or smartphone. For instructions on how to use image.canon services and details on countries and regions where it is available, visit the image.
3. Select [ 4. Select [I Agree]. 5. Establish a Wi-Fi connection. Upload to Web service]. Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi. Go to step 6 in Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points.
6. Enter your email address. Enter your email address, then select [OK]. 7. Enter a four-digit number. Enter a four-digit number of your choice, then select [OK].
8. Select [OK]. The [ ] icon changes to [ ]. Steps on the computer or smartphone 9. Set up camera web link. Access the page in the notification message. Follow the instructions to complete the settings on the camera web link settings page.
Steps on the camera (2) 10. Select [OK]. The [ 11. ] icon changes to [ Select [Upload to Web service]. 609 ].
12. Select [Auto send]. Once [Enable] is set, images are automatically sent when you turn the camera on. 13. Select [Type to send]. Set to [Stills only] or [Stills+movies]. 14. Restart the camera. The images are now sent automatically. To switch networks, select [Switch network] and follow steps 5–8. To remove the connection, select [Clear camera web link settings] and then [OK]. Note All image files on cards are sent when [Auto send] is set to [Enable].
Caution Auto send does not start during interval timer shooting. Transfer stops in the following cases.
Image Transfer to FTP Servers Preparation Connecting to the Access Point Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings FTP Transfer Settings Transferring Multiple Images at Once Adding a Caption Before Transfer Auto Retry If Transfer Fails Viewing Transferred Images Your images can be transferred to an FTP server on the network the camera is connected to. Preparation A computer running one of the following OSes is required. The computer must also be set up in advance to function as an FTP server.
Connecting to the Access Point 1. Set Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. See steps 1–2 in Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi. 2. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 3. Select [ Transfer images to FTP server]. 4. Select [Add a device to connect to].
5. Select [Setting method]. Select an option and then [OK] to go to the next screen. Select [Configure online] to configure connection settings and then join the network. Select [Configure offline] to configure FTP server connection settings without connecting. 6. Select [Connect with WPS]. Follow these steps to connect via WPS (PBC mode). To connect to access points in other ways, see Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points. 7. Select [WPS (PBC mode)]. Select [OK].
8. Press the WPS button on the access point. For details on where the WPS button is and how long to press it, refer to the access point user manual. Select [OK] to initiate connection with the access point. The following screen is displayed once the camera is connected to the access point. 9. Select an IP address setting option. Select [OK]. 10. Select an IPv6 option. Select [OK].
Configuring FTP Server Connection Settings 1. Select an FTP mode. For secure FTP transfer using a root certificate, select [FTPS]. For details on root certificate settings, see Set Root Certif. Select [OK] to go to the next screen. 2. Select [Address setting]. Select [OK] to go to the next screen. The virtual keyboard is displayed if you have specified [Auto setting] for the IP address or [Manual setting] for the DNS address.
3. Enter the FTP server IP address. Use the virtual keyboard ( ) to enter the IP address. If DNS is used, enter the domain name. To set the entered values and return to the screen for step 2, press the < > button. 4. Configure the port number. Normally, set [Port number setting] to 00021. Select [OK] to go to the next screen. 5. Configure the passive mode setting. Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
6. Configure proxy server settings. Not displayed if you selected [FTPS] in step 1. Select [OK] to go to the next screen. 7. Configure the login method. Select [OK] to go to the next screen.
8. Specify a target folder. Select [Root folder] to have images saved in the root folder, as specified in FTP server settings. Select [Select folder] to specify a target folder in the root folder. If the folder does not exist, it is created automatically. Select [OK] to go to the next screen. When the following message appears, select [OK] to trust the target server. 9. Select [OK]. Not displayed in offline configuration. Connection settings for FTP transfer are now complete.
FTP Transfer Settings You can configure settings related to FTP transfer and power saving. 1. Select [ 2. Select [FTP transfer settings]. : Wi-Fi settings].
3. Select an option to configure. Automatic transfer Select [Enable] for automatic image transfer to the FTP server immediately after shooting. You can continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred. Caution Before shooting, make sure a card is in the camera. If you shoot without recording images, they cannot be transferred. Automatic transfer of movies during recording is not supported.
Transfer type/size In [JPEG size to trans.], you can specify the size of images to transfer. For example, to transfer smaller JPEGs when the camera is set to record larger JPEGs to one card and smaller JPEGs to the other, set to [SmallerJPEG]. In [RAW+JPEG transfer] or [RAW+HEIF transfer], you can specify the type of images to transfer.
Set root certif If you specified [FTPS] FTP mode when configuring connection settings, the root certificate used by the FTPS server must be imported to the camera. Caution Only the root certificate with a file name of “ROOT.CER,” “ROOT.CRT,” or “ROOT.PEM” can be imported to the camera. Only one root certificate file can be imported to the camera. Insert a card containing the root certificate file in advance. The priority card selected for [ Record/play] or [ Play] in [ : Record func+card/folder sel.
Transferring Multiple Images at Once Selecting images to transfer Selecting multiple images Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images After shooting, you can select multiple images and transfer them all at once, or you can transfer unsent images or images that could not be sent previously. You can continue shooting still photos as usual during transfer. Caution Image transfer in progress is paused if you switch to movie mode. To resume image transfer, switch to photo mode. Selecting images to transfer 1.
3. Select [FTP transfer]. 4. Select [Sel.Image]. 5. Select the image to transfer. Use the < > dial to select an image to transfer, then press < >. Use the < > dial to add a checkmark [ ] in the upper left of the screen, then press < >. You can turn the < > dial counterclockwise to switch to select the images from 3-image display. To return to single-image display, turn the < > dial clockwise. To select other images to transfer, repeat step 5. After image selection, press the < > button.
6. Select [FTP transfer]. 7. Select [OK]. The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
Selecting multiple images Multiple images can be transferred at once after you choose a selection method. You can continue shooting still photos as usual while images are being transferred. 1. Access the [Image sel./transfer] screen. Follow steps 1–3 in Selecting Images to Transfer. 2. Select [Multiple]. 3. Select a selection method to use. Select range • Select [Select range].
In a folder • Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] selects all images in the selected folder for which transfer failed. • Selecting [Folder images not transfer'd] selects all unsent images in the selected folder. • Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] clears the transfer history of images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Folder images not transfer'd] and transfer all images in the folder again.
5. Select [OK]. The selected images are transferred to the FTP server.
Transferring RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images For RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF images, you can specify which image to transfer. 1. Select [ 2. Select the type of images to transfer. : Image transfer].
RAW+JPEG transfer • Select [RAW+JPEG transfer], then select [JPEG only], [RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG]. RAW+HEIF transfer • Select [RAW+HEIF transfer], then select [HEIF only], [RAW only], or [RAW+HEIF]. Caution Some menu items are not available during image transfer. Note This setting is linked to [RAW+JPEG transfer] and [RAW+HEIF transfer] settings on the [Transfer type/size] screen ( ).
Adding a Caption Before Transfer You can add a registered caption to each image before transfer. This is convenient if you want to inform the recipient of the printing quantity, for example. Captions are also added to images saved to the camera. You can check captions added to images by examining the Exif information, in the user comments. Captions can be created and registered with EOS Utility ( ). 1. Select [ 2. Select [Transfer with caption]. : Image transfer]. The last image viewed is displayed.
3. Specify the caption. Select [Caption], and on the screen displayed, select the content of the caption. 4. Select [Transfer]. The image is transferred with the caption. After transfer, display returns to the [Image transfer] screen. Caution Other images cannot be selected from the [Transfer with caption] screen. To select another image for transfer with a caption, view that image before following these steps.
Auto Retry If Transfer Fails If transfer fails, the camera's access lamp blinks in red. In this case, the following screen is displayed after you press the < > button and select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. To resolve the error displayed, see the troubleshooting information ( ). Once you have resolved the issue, the images that could not be sent initially will be transferred automatically.
Viewing Transferred Images Images transferred to the FTP server are stored in the following folder as specified in the FTP server settings. Target folder of the FTP server Under the default settings of the FTP server, images are stored in [C drive] → [Inetpub] folder → [ftproot] folder, or in a subfolder of this folder. If the root folder of the transfer destination has been changed in the FTP server settings, ask the FTP server administrator where images are transferred.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Camera Access Point Mode Manual IP Address Setup This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point compatible with WPS (PBC mode). First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it. It may take approx. 1 min. to establish a Wi-Fi connection. 1. Set Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. See steps 1–4 in Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi. 2. Select [ 3. Select an option. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].
4. Select [Add a device to connect to]. The following message is displayed if you have selected [ Connect to smartphone]. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. On the [Connect to smartphone] screen displayed next, select [Connect via Wi-Fi]. 5. Select [Switch network]. Displayed when [ ] or [ ] is selected.
6. Select [Connect with WPS]. Note For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 6, see Camera Access Point Mode. 7. Select [WPS (PBC mode)]. Select [OK].
8. Connect to the access point via Wi-Fi. Press the access point's WPS button. Select [OK]. 9. Select [Auto setting]. Select [OK] to access the setting screen for the Wi-Fi function. If an error occurs with [Auto setting], see Manual IP Address Setup.
10. Specify the settings for the Wi-Fi function. [ Connect to smartphone] On the smartphone's Wi-Fi setting screen, tap the SSID (network name) shown on the camera screen, then enter the password of the access point for the connection. Go to step 8 in Wi-Fi Connection without Using Bluetooth. [ Remote control (EOS Utility)] Go to step 7 or 8 in Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility. [ Transfer images to FTP server] Go to step 10 in Connection via Access Points.
Camera Access Point Mode Camera access point mode is a connection mode for connecting the camera directly to each device via Wi-Fi. Displayed when [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected after [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. Easy connection Use the other device to establish a Wi-Fi connection with the SSID shown on the camera screen. Manual connection Enter the SSID of the other device to establish a connection. Follow the instructions on the camera screen to complete the connection settings.
Manual IP Address Setup The options displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function. 1. Select [Manual setting]. Select [OK]. 2. Select an option. Select an option to access the screen for numerical input. To use a gateway, select [Enable], then select [Address].
3. Enter the desired values. Turn the < > dial to move the input position in the upper area, and use the < >< > dials or < > to select numbers to enter. Press < > to enter the selected number. To set the entered numbers and return to the screen for step 2, press > button. the < 4. Select [OK]. When you have completed setting the necessary items, select [OK].
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control Canceling the Pairing This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, via Bluetooth for remote control shooting. 1. Set Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. See steps 1–4 in Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi. 2. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 3. Select [ Connect to Wireless Remote].
4. Select [Add a device to connect to]. 5. Press < 6. Pair the devices. >. When the [Pairing] screen appears, press and hold the and buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for at least 3 sec. After a message confirms that the camera is paired with the BR-E1, press < >.
7. Set up the camera for remote shooting. When shooting still photos, select [ For movie recording, set [ ] or [ ] as the drive mode ( : Remote control] to [Enable]. For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1's Instruction Manual. Caution Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera's auto power off is activated. Note When you will not use Bluetooth, setting this function to [Disable] in step 1 is recommended. 646 ).
Canceling the Pairing Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the connected remote control. 1. Select [ : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 2. Select [ Connect to Wireless Remote]. 3. Select [Delete connection information].
4. Select [OK].
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi Follow these steps to reconnect via Wi-Fi using registered connection settings. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. Select an option to connect to via Wi-Fi from the displayed history. If the option is not displayed, use < > to switch screens. If [Connection history] is set to [Do not display], the history will not be displayed ( ).
3. Operate the connected device. [ ] Smartphone Start Camera Connect. If the smartphone's connection destination has been changed, restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point as the camera. When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi, “_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID. [ ] Computer On the computer, start the EOS software.
Registering Multiple Connection Settings You can register up to 10 connection settings for the wireless communication functions. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. If the history ( dial or < >. ) is displayed, switch screens with the < >< > For details on [ Connect to smartphone], see Connecting to a Smartphone. For details on [ Remote control (EOS Utility)], see Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi.
Note To delete connection settings, see Changing or Deleting Connection Settings.
Airplane Mode You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions. 1. Select [ 2. Set to [On]. [ : Airplane mode]. ] is displayed on the screen. Note [ ] may not be displayed in still photo shooting, movie recording, or playback, depending on display settings. If it is not displayed, press the < > button repeatedly to access detailed information display.
Wi-Fi Settings 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Wi-Fi settings]. Wi-Fi When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited, such as on board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable]. Connection history You can set the connection history for devices connected via Wi-Fi to [Show] or [Do not display]. Send to smartphone after shot Images can be transferred to a smartphone automatically ( FTP transfer settings Images can be transferred to an FTP server ( ).
Bluetooth Settings 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Bluetooth settings]. Bluetooth If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable]. Check connection information You can check the name and communication status of the paired device. Bluetooth address You can check the camera's Bluetooth address.
Nickname You can change the camera nickname (displayed on smartphones and other cameras) as needed. 1. Select [ 2. Enter text using the Virtual Keyboard Operations. : Nickname]. When you finish entering characters, press the < 656 > button.
GPS Device Settings GP-E2 Smartphone GPS Connection Display You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a Bluetoothcompatible smartphone. GP-E2 1. Attach GP-E2 to the camera. Attach GP-E2 to the camera's hot shoe and turn it on. For details, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual. 2. Select [ : GPS device settings].
3. In [Select GPS device], select [GPS receiver]. 4. Take the picture. For details on [Set up], refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual. Caution Precautions when using GP-E2 Before use, check the countries and regions where use of GPS is allowed, and follow local regulations. Update the GP-E2 firmware to Ver. 2.0.0 or later. Firmware updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the Canon website. GP-E2 cannot be connected to the camera with a cable.
Smartphone Complete these settings after installing the dedicated Camera Connect app ( smartphone. 1. On the smartphone, activate location services. 2. Establish a Bluetooth connection. ) on the Start Camera Connect and pair the camera and smartphone via Bluetooth. 3. Select [ 4. In [Select GPS device], select [Smartphone]. 5. Take the picture. : GPS device settings]. Images are geotagged with the information from the smartphone.
GPS Connection Display You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in the GPS connection icon on the screens for still photo shooting or movie recording ( and , respectively). Gray: Location services are off Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired On: Location information acquired For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when GP-E2 is used, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Caution The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the camera via Bluetooth. Direction information is not acquired. Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling conditions or smartphone status. It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after you turn the camera on. Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection first. 1. Select [ 2. Select an option. : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. If the history ( dial or < >.
3. Select [Edit/delete device]. You can change the Bluetooth connection by selecting a smartphone labeled with [ ] in gray. After the [Connect to smartphone] screen is displayed, select [Pair via Bluetooth], then press < > on the next screen. 4. 5. Select the device for which to change or delete the connection settings. Select an option. Change or delete the connection settings on the displayed screen. Change device nickname You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard ( 663 ).
Viewable imgs ( ) Displayed when [ Connect to smartphone] is selected. Settings will appear at the bottom of the screen. Delete connection information When deleting connection information for a paired smartphone, also delete the camera information registered on the smartphone ( ).
Resetting Communication Settings All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless communication settings, you can prevent their information from being exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people. 1. Select [ 2. Select [OK]. : Reset communication settings].
View Info Screen You can check error details and the camera's MAC address. 1. Select [ 2. Press the < : Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. > button. The [View info] screen will appear. When an error has occurred, press < 666 > to display the error content.
Virtual Keyboard Operations (1) Input area, for entering text (2) Cursor keys, for moving in the input area (3) Current no. of characters/no. available (4) Keyboard (5) Switch input modes (6) Space (7) Delete a character in the input area (8) Exit input Use the < > dial to move within (1). Use < > or the < > or < > dial to move within (2) and (4)–(7). Press < > to confirm input or when switching input modes.
Responding to Error Messages When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the examples shown in this chapter. On the [View info] screen, press < >. Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on]. Click the following error numbers to jump to the corresponding section.
11: Connection target not found In the case of [ ], is Camera Connect running? • Establish a connection using Camera Connect ( In the case of [ ). ], is EOS Utility running? • Start EOS Utility and try to connect again ( ). Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption key for authentication? • This error occurs if the encryption keys do not match when the authentication method for encryption is [Open system].
21: No address assigned by DHCP server What to check on the camera On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct setting? • If no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP address to [Manual setting] on the camera ( ). What to check on the DHCP server Is the power of the DHCP server on? • Turn on the DHCP server. Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server? • Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
22: No response from DNS server What to check on the camera On the camera, the DNS address is set to [Manual setting]. Is this the correct setting? • If no DNS server is used, set the camera's DNS address setting to [Disable] ( ). On the camera, does the DNS server's IP address setting match the server's actual address? • Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual DNS server address ( , ). What to check on the DNS server Is the power of the DNS server on? • Turn on the DNS server.
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network Is another device on the camera network using the same IP address as the camera? • Change the camera's IP address to avoid using the same address as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address of the device that has a duplicate address. • If the camera's IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto setting] ( ).
41: Cannot connect to FTP server What to check on the camera The camera's proxy server setting is [Enable]. Is this the correct setting? • If no proxy server is used, set the camera's proxy server setting to [Disable] ( ). Do the camera's [Address setting] and [Port No.] settings match those of the proxy server? • Configure the camera's proxy server address and port number to match those of the proxy server ( ).
On the camera, does the FTP server's IP address setting (in [Address]) match the server's actual address? • Configure the IP address on the camera to match the actual FTP server address ( ). Is a firewall or other security software enabled? • Some security software uses a firewall to restrict access to the FTP server. Change the firewall settings to allow access to the FTP server. • You may be able to access the FTP server by setting [Passive mode] to [Enable] on the camera ( ).
43: Cannot connect to FTP server. Error code received from server. What to check on the proxy server Is the proxy server on? • Turn on the proxy server. Is the proxy server working correctly? • Check the proxy server settings to make sure the server is working correctly as a proxy server. • If applicable, ask your network administrator for the proxy server's address setting and port number, then set them on the camera.
45: Cannot login to FTP server. Error code received from server. What to check on the camera On the camera, is the [Login name] set correctly? • Check the login name for accessing the FTP server. Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct login name is set on the camera ( ). On the camera, is the [Login password] set correctly? • Check upper- and lower-case letters, and make sure the correct login password is set on the camera ( ).
46: For the data session, error code received from FTP server What to check on the FTP server The connection was terminated by the FTP server. • Restart the FTP server. Do the user rights for the FTP server allow reading, writing, and log access? • Configure the FTP server's user rights to allow reading, writing, and log access.
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna of the access point? • Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of view of the camera. What to check on the camera Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point? • Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the camera ( ).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption method? • The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP, and AES ( ). If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in use registered at the access point? • Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point. The MAC address can be checked on the [MAC address] screen ( ).
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the beginning. Did you hold down the access point's WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button for the specified period of time? • Hold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the access point's instruction manual. Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point? • Try establishing the connection when both devices are within reach of each other. 69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot connect.
151: Transmission canceled Automatic image transfer was somehow interrupted. • To resume automatic image transfer, set the camera's power switch to < and then set it to < >. 152: Card's write protect switch is set to lock Is the card's write-protect switch set to the locked position? • Slide the card's write-protect switch to the writing position.
Wireless Communication Function Precautions If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following corrective actions. Distance between the camera and the smartphone If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case, bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Security If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur. Transmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor wireless LAN transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending. Unauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Checking Network Settings Windows Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then enter ipconfig/all and press the key. In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed. macOS In macOS, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press the key. The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated in the [enX] item (X: number) next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
Wireless Communication Status Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.
Bluetooth Function Indicator Bluetooth Function Connection Status Screen Bluetooth connected Other than [Disable] Bluetooth not connected [Disable] Bluetooth not connected 686 Not displayed
Set-up This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([ ]) tab. < to the right of titles indicates functions only available in < >, or < > mode.
Tab Menus: Set-up Set-up 1 (1) Record func+card/folder sel.
Set-up 2 (1) Language (2) Video system (3) Help text size (4) Beep (5) Headphone volume (6) Power saving (7) Eco mode Set-up 3 (1) Screen/viewfinder display (2) Screen brightness (3) Viewfinder brightness (4) Screen/viewfinder color tone (5) Fine-tune VF color tone (6) UI magnification 689
Set-up 4 (1) HDMI resolution (2) Touch control (3) Multi function lock (4) Shutter at shutdown (5) Sensor cleaning Set-up 5 (1) Reset camera (2) Custom shooting mode (C1-C3) (3) Battery info. (4) Copyright information (5) Manual/software URL (6) Certification Logo Display (7) Firmware Caution [Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)] is not displayed in movie recording. In < > mode, the following screens are displayed.
Set-up 5 (1) Battery info.
Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted Recording is possible when card [ ] or [ ] is in the camera (except under some conditions). With only one card inserted, there is no need to follow these steps. With two cards inserted, you can select the recording method and card to use for recording and playback as follows. Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted 1. Select [ : Record func+card/folder sel.].
2. Set the recording method. / separate • Select [Enable] for automatic configuration of the recording method for still photos and movies. Still photos are recorded to card [ ] and movies to card [ ]. • Without card [ ] inserted, still photos can be captured but not saved. Still photo shooting is not possible if the card is full. • Movie recording is not possible if card [ ] is full or not inserted.
Rec options Set the recording method for still photos. • Standard Records still photos to the card selected in [ Record/play]. • Auto switch card Same as [Standard], but shooting ends when the card becomes full. When you resume shooting, the camera switches to the other card automatically. At this time, a new folder is created. • Rec. separately Enables you to set a specific image quality for each card ( ). For each shot, a still photo is recorded to card and in your specified image quality.
Note Rec. separately/Rec. to multiple Images are recorded with the same file number to card . and The number of shots available as shown in the viewfinder and on the Quick Control screen is for the card with less free space. [Card* full] is displayed when one of the cards becomes full, and shooting is no longer possible. To continue shooting, either replace the card or set [ Rec options] to [Standard] and select the card with free space.
Recording/Playback Selection with Two Cards Inserted With [ Rec options]/[ Rec options] set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the card for recording and playback. With [ Rec options] set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple], select the card for playback. Setting size via the menu Standard/Auto switch card Select [Record/play]. • Select [ Record/play] for still photos or [ Record/play] for movies. : Use card 1 for recording and playback : Use card 2 for recording and playback Rec.
Note With [Priority: *] set, the camera switches to the priority card when cards are inserted or removed.
Folder Settings Creating a Folder Renaming Folders Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved. You can also rename folders. Creating a Folder 1. Select [ : Record func+card/folder sel.]. 2. Select [Folder].
3. Select [Create folder]. 4. Select [OK]. To rename the folder, select [Change folder name].
Renaming Folders 1. Enter letters and numbers of your choice. You can enter five characters. By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode. To delete single characters, select [ Use the < enter it. 2. > dial or < ] or press the < > to select a character, then press < Exit the setting. Press the < > button. > button, then press [OK].
Selecting a Folder (1) Number of images in folder (2) Lowest file number (3) Folder name (4) Highest file number Select a folder on the folder selection screen. Captured images are stored in your selected folder. Note Folders Folders are named as in “100EOSR6,” with a three-digit folder number followed by five letters or numbers. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001– 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically.
File Numbering Continuous Auto Reset Manual Reset The captured images saved in a folder are assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999. You can change how the image files are numbered. (Example) (1) File number 1. Select [ : File numbering].
2. Set the item. Select [Numbering]. Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset]. If you want to reset the file numbering, select [Manual reset] ( ). Select [OK] to create a new folder, and the file number will start with 0001. Caution If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if the card still has free space. After a message requesting you to replace the card is displayed, switch to a new card.
Continuous For continuous file numbering regardless of switching cards or creating folders File numbering is continuous up to 9999, even if you replace a card, create a folder, or switch the target card (as in → ). This is useful when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer. Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you switch to.
Auto Reset For restarting file numbering from 0001 after switching cards or creating folders File numbering is reset to 0001 if you replace a card, create a folder, or switch the target card (as in → ). This is useful if you want to organize images by cards or folders. Note that file numbering may continue from any existing images in cards or folders that you switch to. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
Manual Reset For resetting file numbering to 0001 or starting from 0001 in new folders When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001. This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
File Naming File names consist of four alphanumeric characters followed by a four-digit file number ( ) and file extension. You can change the first four alphanumeric characters, which by default are unique for each camera and set when the camera is shipped. User setting 1 enables you to register four characters of your choice. User setting 2 adds three initial, registered characters of your choice to a fourth character representing the image size that is added automatically after you shoot.
3. Enter letters and numbers of your choice. Enter four characters for User setting 1 or three for User setting 2. By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode. To delete single characters, select [ Use the < enter it. 4. > dial or < ] or press the < > to select a character, then press < Exit the setting. Press the < > button. > button, then press [OK].
5. Select a registered file name. Select [File name], then choose a registered file name. Caution An underscore (“_”) cannot be used as the first character. Note User setting 2 Shooting after you have selected “*** + image size” (as registered to User setting 2) will add a character representing the current image size to your file name as the fourth character. Meanings of added characters are as follows.
Formatting If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. Caution When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc. before formatting the card. 1. Select [ : Format card]. 2. Select a card. [ ] represents card 1, and [ Select the card.
3. Format the card. Select [OK]. For low-level formatting, press the < > button to add a checkmark [ ] to [Low level format], then select [OK].
Conditions requiring card formatting The card is new. The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer. The card is full of images or data. A card-related error is displayed ( ). Low-level formatting Perform low-level formatting if the card's writing or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card. Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
Auto Rotate You can change the auto rotation setting that straightens images shot in vertical orientation when they are displayed. 1. Select [ : Auto rotate].
2. Select an option. On Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and computers. On Automatically rotates images only for display on computers. Off Images are not automatically rotated. Caution Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback even if you later set auto rotation to [On]. Note If a picture is taken while the camera is aimed up or down, automatic rotation to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
Adding Orientation Information to Movies For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information indicating which side is up can be added automatically to enable playback in the same orientation on smartphones or other devices. 1. Select [ : Add 2. Select an option. rotate info]. Enable Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in which they were recorded.
Date/Time/Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow these steps to set the time zone first. By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it. Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be sure to set your date/time. 1. Select [ : Date/Time/Zone]. 2. Set the time zone.
Turn the < > dial to select the time zone, then press < If your time zone is not listed, press the < difference from UTC in [Time difference]. >. > button, then set the Turn the < > dial to select a [Time difference] option (+–/hour/ minute), then press < >. Set by turning the < > dial, then press < >. After entering the time zone or time difference, turn the < select [OK], then press < >. 3. Set the date and time.
4. Set daylight saving time. Set it as necessary. Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. When the daylight saving time is set to [ ], the time set in step 3 will advance by 1 hour. If [ ] is set, the daylight saving time will be canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour. 5. Exit the setting. Turn the < > dial to select [OK].
Note Auto power off time may be extended while the [ : Date/Time/Zone] screen is displayed.
Language 1. Select [ : Language 2. Set the desired language. ].
Video System Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting determines the frame rates available when you record movies. 1. Select [ : Video system]. 2. Select an option. For NTSC For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For PAL For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
Help Changing the Help Text Size When [ Help] is displayed, you can display a description of the feature by pressing the < > button. Press it again to exit Help display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, turn the < > dial.
Example: [ : Multi function lock] < > 723
Changing the Help Text Size 1. Select [ : Help text size]. 2. Select an option.
Beeps 1. Select [ : Beep]. 2. Select an option. Enable The camera beeps after focusing and in response to touch operations. Touch Disables beeping for touch operations. Disable Disables beeping for focus confirmation, self-timer shooting, and touch operations.
Headphone Volume 1. Select [ : Headphone volume]. 2. Adjust the volume. Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume, then press < >. Note You can check sound from the built-in microphone or an external microphone on headphones when [ : Sound recording] is set to an option other than [Disable] and [High Frame Rate] is set to [Disable].
Power Saving You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder turn off automatically after the camera is left idle (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off). 1. Select [ : Power saving]. 2. Select an option. Note Even when [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off after the time set in [Display off]. [Display off] and [Auto power off] settings have no effect when [ : Eco mode] is set to [On].
Eco Mode Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1. Select [ : Eco mode]. 2. Select [On]. The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approx. two seconds. Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off, press the shutter button halfway.
Screen/Viewfinder Display You can specify to use the screen or viewfinder for display, to avoid accidentally activating the eye sensor when the screen is open. 1. Select [ : Screen/viewfinder display]. 2. Select an option. AUTO1: Auto 1 ( : only screen) Always use the screen for display when it is swung out. Use the screen for display when it is closed and facing you, and switch to viewfinder display when you look through the viewfinder.
Note You can also switch between viewfinder and screen display by pressing a button you have customized by assigning to switching. With this setting set to [AUTO1] or [AUTO2], the camera responds to the eye sensor accordingly. With [AUTO1] set, the camera responds to the eye sensor when the screen is closed and facing you but does not respond when it is swung out.
Screen Brightness 1. Select [ : Screen brightness]. 2. Make the adjustment. Referring to the gray image, turn the < > dial to adjust brightness, >. Check the effect on the screen. then press < Note To check the image's exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended ( 731 ).
Viewfinder Brightness 1. Select [ : Viewfinder brightness]. 2. Make the adjustment. Referring to the gray image, turn the < > dial to adjust brightness, >. Check the effect in the viewfinder.
Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone 1. Select [ : Screen/viewfinder color tone]. 2. Make the adjustment. Turn the < > dial to select an option, then press < 733 >.
Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone 1. Select [ : Fine-tune VF color tone]. 2. Make the adjustment. Referring to the gray image, use < > for adjustment, then press >. Check the effect in the viewfinder.
UI Magnification You can magnify menu screens by double-tapping with two fingers. Double-tap again to restore the original display size. 1. Select [ : UI magnification]. 2. Select [Enable]. Caution Use camera controls when configuring menu functions with the display magnified. Touch-screen operations are not supported.
HDMI Resolution Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a television or external recording device with an HDMI cable. 1. Select [ : HDMI resolution]. 2. Select an option. Auto The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution matching the connected television. 1080p Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or delay issues when the camera switches resolution.
Touch Control 1. Select [ : Touch control]. 2. Select an option. [Sensitive] makes the touch-screen panel more responsive than [Standard]. To disable touch operations, select [Disable]. Caution Precautions for touch-screen panel operations Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch operations. Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction may occur.
Multi-Function Lock Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This can help prevent accidentally changing settings. 1. Select [ : Multi function lock]. 2. Select camera controls to lock. Press < > to add a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK]. Pressing the < controls. > button locks the selected [ ] camera Note An asterisk “*” to the right of [ : Multi function lock] indicates that the default setting has been modified.
Shutter at Shutdown You can set whether to leave the shutter open or close it when the camera's power switch is set to < >. 1. Select [ : Shutter at shutdown]. 2. Select an option. : Closed Closes the shutter. Normally set to closed, to prevent dust from adhering to the sensor when you switch lenses. : Open Leaves the shutter open. This keeps camera quieter when the power switch is set to < > or < >. Useful when you want to shoot quietly.
Sensor Cleaning Clean Now Clean Automatically Cleaning Manually The camera's sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor. Note For best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other flat surface. Cleaning Now 1. Select [ : Sensor cleaning].
2. Select [Clean now ]. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen. Note Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note that [Clean now ] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
Cleaning Automatically 1. Select [Auto cleaning 2. Select an option. Turn the < ]. > dial to select an option, then press < 742 >.
Cleaning Manually Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool. Always use a fully charged battery. The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended. 1. Select [Clean manually]. 2. Select [OK]. 3. Remove the lens and clean the sensor.
4. End the cleaning. Set the power switch to < >. Note Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended. Caution While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut off, the shutter will close. These may result in damaging the image sensor and shutter curtains. >. • Setting the power switch to < • Removing or inserting the battery. The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.
Resetting the Camera The camera's settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be restored to their defaults. 1. Select [ : Reset camera]. 2. Select an option. Basic settings Restores default settings for camera shooting functions and menu settings. Other settings Settings for individual selected items can be reset. 3. Clear the settings. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Note Custom shooting modes are reset when [Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)] in [Other settings] is selected.
Custom Shooting Mode (C1–C3) Automatic Update of Registered Settings Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes You can register current camera settings such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function settings as Custom shooting modes assigned to < > to < > modes. 1. Select [ : Custom shooting mode (C1-C3)]. 2. Select [Register settings].
3. Register the desired items. Select the Custom shooting mode to register, then select [OK] on the [Register settings] screen. The current camera settings are registered to Custom shooting mode C*. Automatic Update of Registered Settings If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode can be automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of each mode can be restored to default settings, as they were before registration. Note You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
Battery Information Registering Batteries to the Camera Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Not in Use Deleting the Registered Battery Information You can check the conditions of the battery you are using. By registering multiple batteries to the camera, you can check their approximate remaining capacity and usage history. 1. Select [ : Battery info.]. (1) Battery position (2) Model of battery or household power source used.
Caution Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N is recommended. If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera's full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result. Note The shutter count is the number of still photos taken (not including movie recording). Battery information is also displayed when an optional Battery Grip BG-R10 is used. If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions in the message.
Registering Batteries to the Camera You can register up to six LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs to the camera. To register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery. 1. Press the < > button. With the battery info. screen displayed, press the < If the battery is not registered, it will be grayed out. 2. Select [Register]. 752 > button.
3. Select [OK]. The battery is now displayed in white. Note The battery cannot be registered if the household power outlet accessories (sold separately, ) are used.
Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers It is convenient to label registered LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs with their serial numbers, using commercially available labels. 1. On a label approx. 25×15 mm, write the serial number (1). 2. Apply the label. Set the power switch to < >. Remove the battery from the camera. Apply the label as shown in the illustration (on the side with no electrical contacts).
Caution Do not apply the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or impossible to turn on the power. When you use Battery Grip BG-R10 (sold separately), the label may peel off after repeated insertion and removal from the battery magazine. If it peels off, apply a new label.
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Not in Use You can check the remaining capacity of batteries not currently in use, as well as their last date of use. 1. Find the matching serial number. On the battery history screen, find the battery serial number (1) matching the serial number that the battery is labeled with. You can check the respective battery's approximate remaining capacity (2) and the date when it was last used (3).
Deleting the Registered Battery Information 1. Select [Delete info.]. In Registering Batteries to the Camera, select [Delete info.] in step 2. 2. Select the battery information to delete. [ 3. ] is displayed. Press the < > button. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Copyright Information Checking the Copyright Information Deleting the Copyright Information When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information. Caution If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when you select [Display copyright info.]. Note You can also set or check copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS software, ). 1. Select [ : Copyright information]. 2. Select an option.
3. Enter text. Use the < enter it. > dial or < By selecting [ > to select a character, then press < ], you can change the input mode. To delete single characters, select [ 4. ] or press the < > button. Exit the setting. Press the < > to > button, then press [OK]. Checking the Copyright Information When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and [Copyright] information that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
Other Information Manual/software URL To download instruction manuals, select [ : Manual/software URL] and scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone. You can also use a computer to access the website at the URL displayed and download software. Certification Logo Display Select [ : Certification Logo Display] to display some of the logos of the camera's certifications. Other certification logos can be found on the camera body and packaging.
Custom Functions/My Menu You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. You can also add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently to My Menu tabs.
Tab Menus: Customization Custom Functions 1 (1) Exposure level increments (2) ISO speed setting increments (3) Speed from metering/ISO Auto (4) Bracketing auto cancel (5) Bracketing sequence (6) Number of bracketed shots (7) Safety shift Custom Functions 2 (1) Same expo. for new aperture (2) AE lock meter.
Custom Functions 3 (1) Dial direction during Tv/Av (2) Control ring rotation (3) Customize buttons (4) Customize dials (5) Clear customized settings Custom Functions 4 (1) Add cropping information (2) Audio compression (3) Default Erase option (4) Release shutter w/o lens (5) Retract lens on power off (6) Add IPTC information 764
Custom Functions 5 (1) Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) Selecting [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings.
Custom Function Setting Items C.Fn1 C.Fn2 C.Fn3 C.Fn4 C.Fn5 You can customize camera features on the [ ] tab to suit your shooting preferences. Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.
C.Fn1 Exposure level increments Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. 1/3: 1/3-stop 1/2: 1/2-stop Note Display when set to [1/2-stop] is as follows. ISO speed setting increments You can change the manual ISO speed setting increment to a whole stop. 1/3: 1/3-stop 1/1: 1-stop Note Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop increments when ISO Auto is set.
Speed from metering/ISO Auto You can set the ISO speed status after the metering timer ends in cases where, for ISO Auto operation in < >/< >/< >/< >/< > mode, the camera has adjusted the ISO speed during metering or during the metering timer. : Restore Auto after metering : Retain speed after metering Bracketing auto cancel You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the power switch is set to < >.
Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed. When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the following table.
Safety shift If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure. [Shutter speed/Aperture] applies to < > or < > mode. [ISO speed] applies to < >, < >, or < > mode. OFF: Disable Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture ISO: ISO speed Note Safety shift overrides any changes to [ISO speed range] or [Min. shutter spd.
C.Fn2 Same expo. for new aperture The maximum aperture value may decrease (the lowest f/number may increase) in < > mode (manual exposure shooting) with ISO speed set manually (except when set to ISO Auto) if you (1) Change lenses, (2) Attach an extender, or (3) Use a zoom lens with a variable maximum aperture value. This function prevents the corresponding underexposure by adjusting ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv value) automatically to maintain the same exposure as before (1), (2), or (3).
AE lock meter. mode after focus For each metering mode, you can specify whether to lock the exposure (AE lock) once subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF. The exposure will be locked while you keep pressing the shutter button halfway. Select metering modes for AE lock and add a checkmark [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting. Set shutter speed range >, < >, or < > mode, you can set the You can set the shutter speed range. In < shutter speed manually within your specified range.
C.Fn3 Dial direction during Tv/Av Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture value can be reversed. Reverses the turning direction of the < >, < >, and < > dial in < > shooting > dial in other shooting modes. The direction of the < > and mode and only the < < > dial in < > mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation in < >, < >, and < > modes.
2. Select a part of the bar. 3. Select a function to assign. Press < > to set it. You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with [ ] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button. Note [ : Customize buttons] settings are not cleared even if you select [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. To clear the settings, select [ : Clear customized settings].
Functions available for customization AF ●: Default ○: Available for customization Function ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Metering and AF start AF stop ○ AF point selection ○ Direct AF point selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Set AF point to center Switch to registered AF func.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Peaking Focus guide Drive mode*1 * 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording.
Image ●: Default ○: Available for customization Function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Image quality*1 One-touch image quality setting*1 One-touch image quality (hold)*1 Record func+card/folder sel.
Movies ●: Default ○: Available for customization Function ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Zebra pattern*2 Movie recording ○ Pause Movie Servo AF * 2: Cannot be assigned as a function available in still photo shooting.
Operation ●: Default ○: Available for customization Function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ●*3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Flash function settings*1 Dial function settings Depth-of-field preview*1 Reset selected item in Fv mode*1 Reset Tv/Av/ /ISO in Fv mode*1 Quick Control screen Magnify/Reduce ○ Image replay ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Maximize screen brightness (temp) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ●*4 ○ ○ ○ Display off Switch between VF/screen Eco mode Wi-Fi function No function (disabled) * 1: Cannot be assigned as a function available in movie recording. * 3: Default in still photo shooting. * 4: Default in movie recording. Note [ ]: “AF stop button” on Image Stabilizer-equipped super telephoto lenses.
Customize dials Frequently used functions can be assigned to the < 1. Select [ 2. Select a part of the bar. 3. Select a function to assign. >/< >/< >/< > dials. : Customize dials]. Press < > to set it. You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with [ ] in the lower left of the screen by pressing the < > button.
Note [ : Customize dials] settings are not cleared even if you select [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. To clear the settings, select [ : Clear customized settings].
Functions available for dials ●: Default ○: Available for customization Function Select AF method ○ ○ Direct AF point selection ○ ○ ○ AF method (hold meter. btn) ○ Change shutter speed ○ Change aperture value ○ Exposure compensation ○ ○ ○ Set ISO speed ● ○ ○ Change shutter spd. (hold meter. btn) ○ Change aperture (hold meter. btn) ○ Exposure comp. (hold meter. btn) ● Set ISO speed (hold meter. btn) ○ Flash exp comp (hold meter.
Note < < > and < > dials cannot be customized in [ ] mode. >: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters.
Clear customized settings 1. Select [ 2. Select [OK]. : Clear customized settings]. [Customize buttons] and [Customize dials] are restored to defaults.
C.Fn4 Add cropping information Adding cropping information displays vertical lines for the aspect ratio specified in shooting, so that you can compose shots as if shooting with a medium- or large-format camera (6×6 cm, 4×5 inch, and so on). When you shoot, instead of cropping images recorded to the card, the camera adds aspect ratio information to images for cropping in the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
Audio compression Sets audio compression for movie recording. [Disable] allows higher audio quality than when audio is compressed, but file sizes are larger. ON: Enable OFF: Disable Caution Editing movie files recorded with [Disable] and then saving them with compression will also compress the audio. Audio is compressed even if [Disable] is selected when [Movie rec quality] is set to (NTSC) or (PAL).
Retract lens on power off You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) automatically when the camera's power switch is set to < >. ON: Enable OFF: Disable Caution With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting. Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted. Note When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens's focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
Add IPTC information Registering IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information to the camera from EOS Utility (EOS software) enables you to record (add) this information to JPEG/HEIF/RAW still photos at the time of shooting. This is helpful in file management and other tasks using the IPTC information. For instructions on registering IPTC information to the camera and details on the information you can register, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
C.Fn5 Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) Selecting [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings except [Customize buttons] and [Customize dials]. Note Performing [ : Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] does not clear settings configured in [ : Customize buttons] and [ : Customize dials]. To clear the settings, select [ : Clear customized settings]. Note that although information added using [ : Add IPTC information] is retained, the setting changes to [Disable].
Tab Menus: My Menu (1) Add My Menu tab (2) Delete all My Menu tabs (3) Delete all items (4) Menu display 791
Registering My Menu Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs My Menu Tab Settings Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items Menu Display Settings On the My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions you often adjust.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tabs 1. Select [Add My Menu tab]. 2. Select [OK]. You can create up to five My Menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items on My Menu Tabs 1. Select [MY MENU*: Configure]. 2. Select [Select items to register]. 3. Register the desired items. Select an item, then press < >. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen. You can register up to six items. To return to the screen in step 2, press the < 794 > button.
My Menu Tab Settings You can sort and delete items on the menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab itself. Sort registered items You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press < >. With [ ] displayed, turn the > dial to rearrange the item, then press < >. < Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab You can delete any of the registered items.
Rename tab You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*]. 1. Select [Rename tab]. 2. Enter text. To delete single characters, select [ Use the < > or < > dial or < press < > to enter it. By selecting [ 3. ] or press the < ], you can change the input mode. Confirm input. Press the < > button, then select [OK]. 796 > button.
Deleting All My Menu Tabs/Deleting All Items You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered on them. Delete all My Menu tabs You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [ ] tab will revert to its default. Delete all items You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The tabs themselves will remain.
Menu Display Settings You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press the < > button. Normal display Displays the last displayed menu screen. Display from My Menu tab Displays with the [ ] tab selected. Display only My Menu tab Restricts display to the [ ] tab ([ ]/[ ]/[ 798 ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] tabs are not displayed).
Reference This chapter provides reference information on camera features. • Importing Images to a Computer • Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera • Using a Battery Grip • Troubleshooting Guide • Error Codes • System Map • ISO Speed in Movie Recording • Information Display • EF Lenses Supporting 12 Shots/Sec.
Importing Images to a Computer Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable Using a Card Reader Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer. There are three ways to do this. Connecting to a Computer with an Interface Cable 1. Install EOS Utility ( 2. Connect the camera to the computer. ). Use an interface cable. Insert the other end of the cable into the computer's USB terminal (Type-C). 3. Use EOS Utility to import the images.
Using a Card Reader You can use a card reader to import images to a computer. 1. Install Digital Photo Professional ( 2. Insert the card into the card reader. 3. Use Digital Photo Professional to import the images. ). Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual. Note When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi You can connect the camera to the computer via Wi-Fi and import images to the computer ( ). Note By connecting to an FTP server, you can send images on the camera to a computer ( ).
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6NH or LP-E6N without removing it from the camera. The camera can also be powered. Note that Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged this way. Charging 1. Connect the USB power adapter. With the camera power switch set to < adapter plug fully into the digital terminal.
2. Connect the power cord. Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other end into a power outlet. Charging begins, and the access lamp (1) is lit in green. When charging is finished, the access lamp turns off. Supplying power >. However, To power the camera without charging, set the camera power switch to < batteries are charged during auto power off. [ ] is displayed on the screen while the camera is powered this way.
Caution The camera cannot be powered unless a battery pack is in it. When batteries are depleted, the adapter charges them. In this case, power is not supplied to the camera. To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by the access lamp blinking in green), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again.
Using a Battery Grip Attaching Batteries Using a Household Power Outlet Button and Dial Operations Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera Equipped with buttons and dials for vertical shooting, Battery Grip BG-R10 is an optional camera accessory that can power the camera with two batteries. 1. Remove the contact covers. Remove contact covers (1) and (2) on the battery grip. Attach the battery grip contact cover (1) to (2) to store them.
2. Remove the battery compartment cover. Turn off the camera before removing the battery. Remove the battery compartment cover from the camera. Attach the cover to the battery grip. To remove the cover, slide the lever to release it, following the attachment procedure in reverse.
3. Attach and lock the battery grip. Insert the battery in the camera and turn the release dial to lock the battery grip in place. 4. Remove the battery magazine.
Caution When reattaching the battery compartment cover to the camera, attach it opened to at least 90°. Do not touch the camera or battery grip contacts.
Attaching Batteries 1. Attach the batteries. Insert the batteries as shown. When only one battery is used, it can be inserted in either position. To secure the batteries, push in the direction of the arrows until they click into place. To remove the batteries, press the battery magazine lever in the direction of the arrow.
2. Attach the battery magazine. Insert the battery magazine all the way in to secure it. Caution When attaching batteries, make sure the electrical contacts are clean. Wipe off any dirt on the contacts with a soft cloth. Attach batteries after attaching the battery grip to the camera. If the battery grip is attached to the camera with batteries already attached, it may prevent correct display of battery check results. Before removing the battery grip, turn the camera off and remove the batteries.
Using a Household Power Outlet 1. Attach the DC coupler. Attach DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) the same way as the batteries. Pass the DC coupler cord through the battery magazine cord groove. Insert the battery magazine all the way in to secure it. 2. Attach the battery magazine. Guide the end of the cord out of the cord hole.
3. Connect the DC coupler to the AC adapter. Securely connect the DC coupler's plug to the socket of AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately). 4. Connect the power cord. Connect the power cord to the AC power adapter and insert the power plug into a power outlet. Caution While the camera is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or socket, and do not remove the battery magazine. Avoid getting the DC coupler cord caught between the battery grip and battery magazine.
Button and Dial Operations To use the buttons and dials, turn the vertical-grip on/off switch (4) to ON. The buttons and dials are used the same way as corresponding buttons and dials on the camera.
Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1, you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6NH or LP-E6N without removing it from the battery grip. Caution LP-E6NH and LP-E6N can be charged together. Otherwise, you can charge a single LP-E6NH or LP-E6N battery at a time. LP-E6 cannot be charged this way. No battery will be charged if LP-E6NH or LP-E6N is attached at the same time as LP-E6. The battery is not charged if LP-E6NH or LP-E6N is loaded when DC Coupler DR-E6 is connected.
2. Charge the battery. Connect the power cord to the USB power adapter and plug the other end into a power outlet. Charging begins, and the charge lamp lights up. When charging is finished, the charge lamp turns off. Supplying power To power the camera without charging batteries, set the camera power switch to < However, batteries are charged during auto power off. ] is displayed on the screen while the camera is powered this way.
Caution The camera cannot be powered unless a battery pack is in it. To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. If the charging lamp fails to light up or a problem occurs during charging (shown by the charge lamp blinking), unplug the power cord, reinsert the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
Troubleshooting Guide Power-related problems Shooting-related problems Problems with wireless features Operation problems Display problems Playback problems Sensor cleaning problems Computer connection problems If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. Power-related problems Batteries cannot be charged with the battery charger.
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold separately). Batteries are not charged while the camera power switch is set to < >. However, batteries are charged during auto power off. Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged. Batteries are not charged when their remaining capacity is already approx. 94% or higher. Operating the camera will stop charging in progress. The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power adapter.
[Battery communication error. Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed. Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6NH/ LP-E6N/LP-E6. Remove and install the battery again ( ). If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them. The battery becomes exhausted quickly. Use a fully charged battery ( ). The battery performance may have degraded. See [ : Battery info.] to check the battery recharge performance level ( ).
Shooting-related problems The lens cannot be attached. To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses ( ). No images can be shot or recorded. Make sure the card is properly inserted ( ). Slide the card's write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting ( ). If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space ( , ). Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to focus.
The continuous shooting speed is slow. High-speed continuous shooting may be slower depending on the battery level, ambient temperature, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, shooting settings, and other conditions. For details, see Selecting the Drive Mode or Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting. The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be selected for still photo shooting. Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [ : ISO speed settings]. Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced]. Expanded ISO speeds are not available when [HDR shooting ] in [ : HDR PQ settings] is set to [Enable]. Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image comes out bright. Set [ : Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] ( ).
The flash always fires at full output. Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash mode always fire at full output ( ). When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will always fire at full output ( ). Flash exposure compensation cannot be set. If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera.
A[ ] icon is displayed during movie recording. It indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. Movie recording is not possible as long as [ ] is displayed. Display of [ ] during movie recording also indicates that the camera will turn off automatically in approx. 3 min. ( ). Movie recording stops by itself. If the card's writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop automatically. For cards that can record movies, see Card performance requirements.
The subject looks distorted during movie recording. If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie recording. Sound is not recorded in movies. Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies. A time code is not added. Time codes are not added when you record High Frame Rate movies with [Count up] in [ : Time code] set to [Free run] ( ).
Problems with wireless features Cannot pair with a smartphone. Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or later. Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen. Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone's Bluetooth settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) on the smartphone ( ). Pairing with a previously paired smartphone is not possible if pairing information registered for another camera remains on the smartphone.
Operation problems Settings change when I switch from still photo shooting to movie recording or vice versa. Separate settings are retained for use when shooting still photos and recording movies. I cannot adjust settings with < >, < >, < >, < Press the < > button to release the Multi-function lock ( Check the [ : Multi function lock] setting ( ). >, < >, or < ). Touch operation is not possible. Make sure [ : Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] ( ).
Display problems The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items. In < > mode, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies. The display starts with [ ] My Menu, or the [ ] tab alone is displayed. [Menu display] on the [ ] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] ( ). The file name's first character is an underscore (“_”). Set [ : Color space] to [sRGB].
The screen does not display a clear image. If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it. The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in high temperatures, but it will return to normal at room temperature.
Playback problems Part of the image blinks in black. [ : Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] ( ). A red box is displayed on the image. [ : AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] ( ). During image playback, the AF points are not displayed. AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back: • Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied. • Cropped images. • Images from HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable]. The image cannot be erased.
Movie playback stops by itself. Extended movie playback or movie playback under high ambient temperature may cause the camera's internal temperature to rise, and movie playback may stop automatically. If this happens, playback is disabled until the camera's internal temperature decreases, so turn off the power and let the camera cool down a while. The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
Dots of light appear on the image. White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors. Their appearance may be reduced by performing [Clean now ] under [ : Sensor cleaning] ( ).
Sensor cleaning problems The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning. Although there is a mechanical sound from the shutter during cleaning after [Clean now ] is selected, no image is recorded to the card ( ). Automatic sensor cleaning does not work. Repeatedly turning the power switch < > and < prevent the [ ] icon from being displayed ( ).
Computer connection problems I cannot import images to a computer. Install EOS Utility (EOS software) on the computer ( ). Make sure the main EOS Utility window is displayed. If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with any computer connected with an interface cable. Check the version of the application. Communication between the connected camera and computer does not work. When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [ 835 : Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] ( ).
Error Codes (1) Error number (2) Cause and countermeasures If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the problem persists, write down the error code (Errxx) and request service.
System Map : Bundled accessories 837
(1) Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2 (2) Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT (3) Speedlite EL-100 (4) Speedlite 430EX III-RT/430EX III (5) Speedlite 470EX-AI (6) Speedlite 600EX II-RT (7) Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II (8) Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT (9) Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (10) Stereo Microphone DM-E100 (11) Headphones (12) GPS Receiver GP-E2 (13) Remote Switch RS-60E3 (14) Remote Controller RC-6 (15) Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (16) Remote Switch RS-80N3 (17) Timer Remo
* 1: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can also be used. * 2: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used. * 3: Charging with USB Power Adapter PD-E1 is only available for LP-E6NH/LP-E6N (not LP-E6). * 4: Camera and computer end: USB Type-C. * 5: The transmission rate when IFC-100U is used is equivalent to SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1 Gen 1). * 6: The transmission rate when IFC-400U is used is equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0). * 7: Use a cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.). The camera end is Type D.
ISO Speed in Movie Recording In [ ] mode ISO speed is set automatically in a range of ISO 100–25600. Setting [Max for Auto] in [ : ISO speed settings] to [H (204800)] ( ) expands the maximum speed in the automatic setting range to H (equivalent to ISO 204800). The minimum speed in the automatic setting range is ISO 200 when [ : Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] ( ). The maximum limit is not expanded, even when expansion is set in [Max for Auto].
Information Display Still Photo Shooting Screen Movie Recording Screen Scene Icons Playback Screen Still Photo Shooting Screen Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change. The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1) Maximum burst (2) Number of available shots/Sec. until self-timer shoots (3) Focus bracketing/HDR/Multiple exposures/Multi Shot Noise Reduction/Bulb timer/Interval timer (4) Shooting mode (5) AF method (6) AF operation (7) Image quality (8) Card (9) Drive mode (10) Metering mode (11) Multi-function lock warning (12) No.
(25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) (39) (40) (41) (42) (32) (33) (25) AEB/FEB (26) View Assist (27) HDR PQ (28) Flash ready/FE lock/High-speed sync (29) Electronic shutter (30) Touch Shutter/Create folder (31) AE lock (32) Shutter speed (33) Aperture value (34) Wi-Fi function (35) Wi-Fi signal strength (36) Bluetooth function (37) Exposure simulation (38) Magnify button (39) ISO speed (40) Highlight tone priority (41) Exposure compensation (42)
Movie Recording Screen Each time you press the < > button, the information display will change. The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(28) (29) (30) (21) (22) (23) (31) (32) (33) (34) (24) (25) (26) (27) (21) Audio recording level indicator (manual/line input) (22) Movie self-timer (23) AE lock (24) Shutter speed (25) Multi-function lock warning (26) Canon Log (27) Aperture value (28) Wi-Fi function (29) Wi-Fi signal strength (30) Bluetooth function (31) ISO speed (32) Highlight tone priority (33) Exposure compensation (34) Exposure level indicator (metering levels) Caution You can specify the information di
Scene Icons In < > shooting mode, the camera detects the type of scene and sets all settings accordingly. The detected scene type is indicated in the upper left of the screen. People Subject Subjects Other Than People In Motion*1 Background Nature/ Outdoor Scene In Motion*1 Close*2 Background Color Bright Gray Backlit Blue Sky Included Light blue Backlit *3 Sunset *3 Orange Spotlight Dark With Tripod*1 Dark blue *4*5 *3 *3 * 1: Not displayed during movie recording.
Playback Screen Basic information display for still photos (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) (7) (8) (9) (15) (16) (17) (11) (12) (13) (14) (1) HDR output status/View Assist (2) Bluetooth function (3) Wi-Fi signal strength (4) Wi-Fi function (5) Battery level (6) Current image no./Total images/No. of images found (7) Shutter speed (8) Aperture value (9) Exposure compensation amount (10) Already sent to a computer/smartphone (11) Rating (12) Image protection (13) Card no.
Caution If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may not be displayed. It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other cameras.
Detailed information display for still photos (1) (9) (2) (3) (10) (11) (4) (12) (13) (5) (6) (14) (15) (7) (16) (8) (17) (1) Aperture value (2) Picture Style/Settings (3) Shutter speed (4) White balance correction/Bracketing (5) Shooting mode/Multiple exposure/Frame Grab (6) White balance (7) Auto Lighting Optimizer (8) Image quality/Edited image/Cropping (9) Exposure compensation amount (10) Shooting date and time (11) Histogram (Brightness/RGB) (12) ISO speed (13) Scr
Detailed information display for movies (1) (2) (6) (3) (4) (5) (7) (8) (1) Movie playback (2) Movie recording mode/High Frame Rate mode (3) Image size (4) Frame rate (5) Compression method (6) Image Stabilizer (IS mode) (7) Recording time/Time code (8) Movie recording format * For simplicity, explanations are omitted for items that are also included in basic/detailed information display for still photos, which are not shown here.
EF Lenses Supporting 12 Shots/Sec. Continuous Shooting The following EF lenses support 12 shots/sec. continuous shooting in [ EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM EF35mm f/1.4L II USM EF35mm f/2 IS USM EF40mm f/2.8 STM EF50mm f/1.8 STM EF85mm f/1.4L IS USM EF200mm f/2.8L II USM EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM EF400mm f/2.8L IS III USM EF500mm f/4L IS II USM EF600mm f/4L IS II USM EF600mm f/4L IS III USM EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM EF11-24mm f/4L USM EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM EF24-70mm f/2.
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM EF-S35mm f/2.8 EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S18-55mm f/4-5.6 IS STM EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.
Specifications Type Type: Digital single-lens non-reflex AF/AE camera Lens mount: Canon RF mount Compatible lenses: Canon RF lens group * Using mount adapter EF-EOS R: Canon EF or EF-S lenses (excluding EF-M lenses) Lens focal length: Same as the focal length indicated on the lens * Using EF-S lenses: Approx. 1.6 times the indicated focal length Image sensor Type: CMOS sensor Screen size Approx. 35.9×23.9 mm Effective pixels*1*2 Max. approx. 20.
Still photo recording Still photo pixel count Recorded pixels Image quality Aspect ratio JPEG HEIF RAW / 3:2 [1.6x (crop)]*1 4:3 16:9 1:1 Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472×3648) Approx. 7.7 megapixels (3408×2272) Approx. 17.7 megapixels (4864×3648) Approx. 16.8 megapixels (5472×3072) Approx. 13.3 megapixels (3648×3648) Approx. 8.9 megapixels (3648×2432) Approx. 7.9 megapixels (3248×2432) Approx. 7.5 megapixels (3648×2048) Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2432×2432) Approx. 5.
Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting Maximum burst [Approx.]*5 Image quality JPEG*3 HEIF*4 File size [Approx. MB] Possible shots [Approx.]*1 7.1 3.9 Standard card*1 High-speed card*2 (UHS-II) 4240 1000 or more 1000 or more 7720 1000 or more 1000 or more 4.0 7470 1000 or more 1000 or more 2.3 12710 1000 or more 1000 or more 2.8 10860 1000 or more 1000 or more 1.7 17460 1000 or more 1000 or more 1000 or more 1.
Movie recording Movie recording format: MP4 Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, and file size Canon Log : OFF, HDR PQ : OFF Movie recording size Movie recording Frame rate (fps) Total recording time (Approx.) Compression method 8 GB 32 GB 128 GB Movie bit rate (Approx. Mbps) File size (Approx. MB/min.) NTSC PAL 59.94 50.00 IPB (Standard) 4 min. 18 min. 1 hr. 13 min. 230 1656 29.97 23.98 25.00 IPB (Standard) 8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 120 869 4K UHD (Time-lapse movie) 29.
Canon Log : ON or HDR PQ : ON Movie recording size Movie recording Frame rate (fps) Total recording time (Approx.) Compression method 8 GB 32 GB 128 GB Movie bit rate (Approx. Mbps) File size (Approx. MB/min.) NTSC PAL 59.94 50.00 IPB (Standard) 3 min. 12 min. 49 min. 340 2443 29.97 23.98 25.00 IPB (Standard) 6 min. 24 min. 1 hr. 39 min. 170 1227 4K UHD (Time-lapse movie) 29.97 25.00 ALL-I 2 min. 9 min. 36 min. 470 3362 Full HD (High Frame Rate movie) 119.88 100.
Card performance requirements (Movie recording) [Write/Read out speed] Movie recording size SD card Frame rate (fps) Resolution Compression method H.264/MPEG-4 AVC (Canon Log : OFF, HDR PQ : OFF) H.265/HEVC (Canon Log : ON or HDR PQ : ON) UHS-II, Video Speed Class 60 or higher NTSC PAL 59.94 50.00 IPB (Standard) UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher 29.97 23.98 25.00 IPB (Standard) UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher 119.88 100.00 IPB (Standard) UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher 59.94 50.
Built-in and external microphones Built-in microphone: Stereo microphones External microphone: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack Recording media Recording media: SD, SDHC, SDXC memory cards Card slot: Equipped with dual card slots Viewfinder (Electronic viewfinder) Type: OLED color electronic viewfinder Screen size: 0.5 inch Dot count: Approx. 3,690,000 dots Magnification / angle of view: Approx. 0.76× / Approx. 35.2° (with 50mm lens, at infinity, – 1 m–1) Coverage: Approx.
Autofocus Focusing method: Dual Pixel CMOS AF Focusing operation Still photo shooting Movie recording AF operation One-Shot AF Servo AF AI Focus AF (with Scene Intelligent Auto) One-Shot AF Movie Servo AF Manual focus Supported Supported Number of AF zones available for automatic selection AF zone Number of AF zone Horizontal: Approx. 100%, Vertical: Approx. 100% Still photos Max. 1053 zones (39×27) Movie Max. 819 zones (39×21) * May vary depending on settings.
Exposure control Metering functions under various shooting conditions Item Metering sensor Metering mode Still photo shooting Movie recording 384 zone (24×16) metering using image sensor output signals Yes Evaluative metering Yes Partial metering Yes: Approx. 5.8 % of the screen Spot metering Yes: Approx. 2.
ISO Auto details in still photo shooting Shooting mode No flash Using flash ISO 100–25600 ISO 100–6400*4 ISO 100*1*2–102400*2 ISO 100*1*2–6400*2*4 ISO 400*3 ISO 400*3 * 1: ISO 200 when [ ：Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced]. * 2: Varies depending on [Maximum] and [Minimum] of [Auto range]. * 3: If outside the setting range, changed to the value most close to ISO 400. * 4: ISO 1600 when using lenses imcompatible with [Variable control of maximum ISO Auto limit for E-TTL].
Maximum setting of ISO Auto range in movie recording Item ISO speed Max for Auto ISO 6400–H (204800) [Time-lapse movie] Max for Auto ISO 400–25600 * Expanded ISO speeds are noted as being “equivalent” to these speeds.
Shutter Still photo shooting Type: Electronically controlled focal-plane shutter Shutter mode Mechanical shutter Electronic 1st curtain Electronic shutter Shutter speed When [Mechanical] or [Elec. 1stcurtain] is set 1/8000–30 sec., Bulb When [Electronic] is set 1/8000–0.5 sec. X-sync Mechanical shutter 1/200 sec. Electronic 1st curtain 1/250 sec. Movie recording Type: Rolling shutter, using the image sensor Shutter speed: Movie auto exposure: 1/4000–1/25 sec.
Image stabilization (IS mode): Provided Playback Item Still photo Movie Magnify zoom display 1.
Power source Battery Compatible battery packs LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 Quantity used 1 USB battery charging and camera power: Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 AC power source AC adapter AC-E6N DC coupler DR-E6 Possible shots Configuration Shooting method Battery Temperature Battery life (Approx.
Available operating time Conditions of use Temperature Available operating time Time available for bulb exposure 23°C / 73°F Approx. 5 hr. 40 min. Time available for Live View shooting 23°C / 73°F Approx. 4 hr. 15 min. 23°C / 73°F Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. 23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 40 min. 0°C / 32°F Approx. 2 hr. 25 min. Screen on 23°C / 73°F Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. Screen off 23°C / 73°F Approx. 7 hr. 55 min. 23°C / 73°F Approx. 5 hr. 35 min.
Dimensions and weight Dimensions (W)×(H)×(D) Approx. 138.4×97.5×88.4 mm (W)×(H)×(D) Approx. 5.45×3.84×3.48 in. * Based on CIPA guidelines. Weight Body (including battery and memory card) Approx. 680 g Approx. 23.99 oz. Body only Approx. 598 g Approx. 21.10 oz. * Weighed without body cap.
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) communication functions Standards compliance Wi-Fi standards Transmission method Maximum link speed IEEE802.11b DS-SS modulation 11Mbps IEEE802.11g 54Mbps OFDM modulation IEEE802.11n 72.2Mbps Transmission frequency (Center frequency) Frequency 2412–2462 MHz Channels 1–11 channels * Specifications vary by country/region.
Trademarks and Licensing Trademarks About MPEG-4 Licensing Accessories Trademarks Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google LLC. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S.
About MPEG-4 Licensing “This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Accessories Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery).
Canon CT2-B129 EOSR6 I I I Instruction Manual Mode d'emploi Instrucciones
Canon EOSR6 For complete instructions, refer to the Advanced User Guide. The guide can be viewed on a computer or smartphone. https :I/cam .start.
Introduction Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the "Safety Instructions" ( QJ 21-QJ23) and "Handling Precautions" (lll24-(JJ26). Also, read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly. Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded.
Item Check List Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer. I Camera (with body cap) Battery Pack LP-E6NH (with protective cover) Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E* Strap * Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.) • The camera does not come with a memory card ( ClJ 10), interface cable, or HDMI cable. • If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Instruction Manuals 0 The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions. • Advanced User Guide For complete instructions, refer to the Advanced User Guide. For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website. https://cam.start.canon/C004/ • Lens/Software Instruction Manual Download from the following website. https://cam.start.
-----~------- 1 5
Insert the battery ( (ll43). • Upon purchase. charge the battery to start using (lll40). l Insert the card (W44). 3 Attach the lena ( Ill 50). 4 Set the lens's focus mode switch to (WSO). s Set the pc,wer ewltch to 6 • You can insert two cards. • Align the red mount index on the lens with the Nd mount index on the camera to attach the lens. (W41).
Quick Start Guide I 7
About This Manual : Indicates the Main dial. : Indicates Quick control dial 1. : Indicates Quick control dial 2. : Indicates the Multi-controller. : Indicates the lens control ring. : Indicates the Set button. : Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button you pressed, as timed after you release the button.
About This Manual I • Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to and the Multi-function lock feature is off ( (JJ48, QJ 63). • It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults. • The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the RF24105mm F4 L IS USM lens as an example. • The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are for instructional purposes only.
Compatible Cards The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (lll 181). • SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards UHS-11 and UHS-1 cards supported. When recording movies, use a card with ample performance (fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording quality. In this manual, ''card" refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards.
Chapters 2 I Preparation and Basic Operations 39 I Shooting Mode 11 I Shooting and Recording s3 I AF/Drive 123 I Playback 141 I Wireless Features 1s9 I Set-up 111 I Custom Functions/My Menu 193 1 Reference 191 1 Introduction 11
Contents Item Check List ............................................................................... ....... 3 Instruction Manuals ........................ ............ ............. .......... .................... .4 Quick Start Guide ................................... ................................................ 6 About This Manual ....................... .......... ....... ......................................... 8 Compatible Cards ........................... ...................................
Contents Quick Control .......................................................................................69 Touch-Screen Operation ......................................................................70 Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............................... 72 Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ........................... 75 Fv: Flexible-Priority AE .........................................................................76 P: Program AE ..................
Contents Picture Style Selection ...................................................... .................101 Clarity .................................................................................................103 Lens Aberration Correction ............................................................... .104 Long Exposure Noise Reduction ....................................................... 105 High ISO Speed Noise Reduction ..... ............................................. ....
Contents Tab Menus: Playback ......................................................................... 148 Image Playback .......................... ........................................ ............... 150 Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) .......................... .............. ...... 153 Movie Playback ...... ............................................................................ 154 Erasing Images ... .............................................. ............ ......... ............
Contents Tab Menus: Customization ................................................................. 194 Tab Menus: My Menu ......................................................................... 196 Index ........ ........................................... ....................... ........ ................ 205 [:II • 16 For troubl8shoottng 1nfottna1Joft. -.101he A
Index to Features • Charging the battery Ol l40) • Dioptric adjustment ((ll 55) • Battery level ( QJ49) • Information display in viewfinder • Checking battery information (!PDF!) I (!PDF!) • Household power outlet (!PDF!) • Viewfinder vertical display ( !PDFI) • Eco mode (lll 188) • Viewfinder display format (!PDF!) • Power saving ( QJ 187) • Brightness ( W 190) • Color tone ( !PDFI) • Adjusting color tone (!PDF!) • Formatting (W 181) • Releasing shutter without card (!PDFI) • Vari-angle ( W 4
Index to Features • Metering mode ( IPDF!) • Shooting mode ( llJ 31) • HOR PQ (IPDF!) • HOR mode (!PDF!) • Drive mode ( CD 143) • Focus bracketing (!PDF!) • Self-timer ( QJ 145) • Multiple exposure ( IPDF!) • Maximum burst ((JJ 91) • Interval timer (IPDF!) • Bulb timer ( IPDF!) • Shutter mode ( IPDF!) • Creating/Selecting a folder ( IPDF!) • Depth-of-field preview ( IPDF!) • File numbering (IPDFI) • Remote switch (!PDF!) • Remote control ( IPDF! ) • Quick Control (lll69) • Image quality (QJ90)
Index to Features • Zebra display ( !PDFI) • External flash ( CIJ 98) • Flash exposure compensation ((ll 98) • Time code (!PDF!) • Image Stabilizer (IS mode) (!PDF!) • Add movie rotation info ( !PDFI) • FE lock ( QJ 98) • Flash function settings ( !PDFI) • Flash Custom Function settings (!PDF!) • Image review time (!PDF!) • Single-image display (lll 150) • Shooting information display (!PDF!) • Grid display (!PDF!) • Autoexposure recording ( Ill 114) • Touch playback ( (ll 152) • Manual exposure reco
Index to Features • RAW image processing (!PDF!) • Connect to smartphones ( QJ 163) • JPEG/HEif resizing (IP□FI) • JPEG/HEif cropping (IP□FI) • Auto send images to smartphones (!PDF!) • HEIF---+-JPEG conversion (!PDFI) • Remote control (EOS Utility) (!PDFI) • Transfer images to FTP server (!PDFI) • Print ordering (DPOF) (!PDF!) • Upload to Web services (IP□FI) • Photobook Set-up (!PDF!) • Connect to a wireless remote control (!PDF!) • Clear wireless settings (!PDF!) • Custom Functions (C.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely. Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others. ~ WARNING: I Denotes the risk of serious injury or death. • Keep the product out of the reach of young children. A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation. The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Safety Instructions • Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter. • Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth. • Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands. • Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet. • Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
Safety Instructions A\. ~ CAUTION. • Follow the cautions below. Otherwise physical injury or property damage may result. • Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes. • Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time. This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use. • Flash emits high temperatures when fired.
Handling Precautions Camera Care • This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. • The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. • To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
Handling Precautions • Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, or other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. • Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.
Handling Precautions Screen and Viewfinder • Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01 % or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded . • If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed.
Handling Precautions Smudges on the Image Sensor • Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a nearest Canon Service Center. Battery Tips for using the battery and charger • Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. • When storing the battery for extended periods, charge it about once a year.
Nomenclature (1) - - - - - - - , . . - - - - - - - (14) (2) - - - - - , -----.- - - - - (15) ,,-~~· · = / ~ ~ - - - - ( 16) (3)- ~ ~,~ ·~ - - (17) (4) (5) (6) - - - - ~ ~ (7) - - - - - - . . . . - - - (18) (19) ~ - - (20) - ~ - . , , = . . ~ f f , 4 - - - (21) (8 ) - (9) ---- - - - - (22) (23) ~~!,.✓,___ _ _ _ (10) - - - - - ' (11) (12) - - - - - ~ (13) - - - - - - - ~ ~· (24) v~---. I ~ \~ \~ -~ -- - ,-,,,,_ ____ ~--~ (1) Mode dial (13) Lens mount (2) Multi-function lock b
Nomenclature (1)- - - - - - ~ (2) - - - - - - - , (3)- - - ~ ~~---- . - (4) I I 1----tt---: ( 16) f ! ~-+-+- ' I 'I ~ (17) : (18) ; aflti~~t- (6) ~;;:=:,...--4- (7) ~ - - t - (8) I ~ ..----- (5) (9) - (10) ~ - - (11) (19) (20) ,______ -(12) .
Nomenclature (1) - - - - - - (7) ~ - - - - (8) ,,.----- (9) ~ ~ - (10) I f/ I •• ,••••.•••••••.••••••••••••••••.
Nomenclature Mode Dial ■ You can set the shooting mode. <: I,, (1)-- ~ A+ ~ (4) (3) (1) <(!1'> mode All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject or scene for shooting. at: Scene Intelligent Auto (UJ 72) (2) , , , , , and modes These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as desired.
Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Display Information displayed varies depending on camera status.
Nomenclature Battery Charger LC-E6 I Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 (lll40). (1) Battery pack slot . -(3) (2) Charge lamp (3) Power plug (1 ) ---++~C) (2) - .... ~.. ." -, ~ -"; Battery Charger LC-E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (lll40).
Nomenclature ,®{~ ,~ ~ @ @ 34 Pass the end of the strap through the camera's strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap's buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.
Software This section summarizes software used with EOS cameras. Note that downloading and installing the software requires an internet connection. The software cannot be downloaded or installed in environments without an internet connection. EOS Utility Enables you to transfer your captured still photos and movies from the camera to a connected computer, set various camera settings from the computer, and shoot remotely from the computer.
Software Always install the latest version of the software. Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the latest version. D • Do not connect the camera to a cqmputer before you install the software. The 80ftWare wHt not be installed COl'l'.ectlY• The softwale cannot be lnatalled unleas the computer is connected to the Internet. • Previous versions cannot display Images from this camera correctly. Also. processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
Software (1) Double-click the dmg file. • A drive icon and installer file·will appear on the desktop. If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon to display it. (2) Double-click the installer file. • The installer starts. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to your computer. • Software Instruction Manual Download Site https:1/cam.start.
38
Preparation and Basic Operations This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.
Charging the Battery 1 Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. l Fully insert the battery in the charger. • Do the opposite to remove the battery. LC-E6 ~~~~~;;.;;-;:;;...:::::::----... 3 Recharge the battery. For LC-E6 • As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger's prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet. LC-E6E For LC-E6E • Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet.
Charging the Battery 0-49% 50-74% Blinks once per second Orange 75% or higher Fully charged Green Blinks twice per second Blinks three times per second I Turned on • It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C/73°F). The time required to charge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery's remaining capacity.
Charging the Battery • Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. • Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity. • After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet. • You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery is recharged or not.
Inserting/Removing the Battery Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6NH (or LP-E6N/LP-E6) into the camera. · ~1 Slide the battery compartment •'//-;;:,;; I cover lock and open the cover. w◄ ... \ @•II ' ~ ~--t-,_., -~-~ ~::-/~~~ -----.____ • .-,}> 1~: ~ ·--,-- " -, , / 1/ . ~/ {I; l lnse,r t the battery. • • . Insert the end with the electrical contacts. Insert the battery until it locks in place. Close the cover. • Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Inserting/Removing Cards This camera accepts two cards. Recording is possible as long as there is at least one card in the camera. With two cards inserted, you can select one card to record to, or you can record the same image to both cards at once. D • Mab •u,. ._ canrs wwb-protect awlfch (1) Is set upward to enable writing and erasing. 1 Slide the cover to open it. (1) 2 Insert the card. • The card in the rear card slot is[[)], and the one in front of it is([~].
Inserting/Removing Cards 4 Set the power switch to (3) (2) (4) ( IJJ48). • The image area or Quick Control screen ( QJ69) accessed by pressing the button shows which cards are loaded. Cards labeled with[ ► ] are selected for recording. (2)(3) (4) (2) (3) (4) Card selection icon Card 1 Card 2 If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera ( LD 181 ).
Inserting/Removing Cards 1 Open the cover. • Set the power switch to . • Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover. • If [Saving ...) is displayed on the screen, close the cover. (1) l Remove the card. • Gently push in the card, then let it go to eject. • Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. Caution Do not remove cards immediately after a red [lnl] icon is displayed as you are shooting. Cards may be hot, due to high internal camera temperature.
Using the Screen You can change the direction and angle of the screen. ,~ 9 1 Flip out the screen. \\ l 1 ) 1 !I J2 1 I Rotate the screen. • When the screen is swung out, you can rotate it up, down, or over 180° to face the subject. • The indicated angle is only approximate. 3 Face it toward you. • Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.
Turning on the Power - .. · · ,5 \ ~\s,_, e The camera turns on. • The camera is turned off and does not function . Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera. If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see W 182 to set the date/time/zone. To change the interface language, see Ill 184. • Whenever you set the power switch to , sensor cleaning will be performed automatically. (A small sound may be audible.
Turning on the Power When the power switch is set to , the battery level will be indicated.
Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses U at the eun diractty. through any tens. C)Olnrt• ,nay-- lose of •J --lllftlfrinM'I • part ~ - M g ) 0 touch 1M IOtaling part Mt 'I PQWer switch to . •,:f ll!lllalia.. not Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust. When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to the camera. Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it. 1 Remove the caps.
Attaching/Detaching RF Lenses 3 Set the lens's focus mode switch to . • stands for autofocus. • stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. I • For RF lenses without a focus mode switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the camera menu, in [AF: Focus mode]. 4 Remove the front lens cap. While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. • Turn the adapter until it stops, then detach it. • Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses. 1 Remove the caps. • Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. •---...;,, ,, - r ~;~~ o . ~ CD . ( ros ..!6-, I 0 , (1) __,II- - - ___ l Attach the lens to the adapter.
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses 3 Attach the adapter to the camera. (3) ...-...:: • Align the red mount indexes (3) on the adapter and camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place. - J:- -~~ 3)~ ~~?~~~µ 0,114 ~~- 1~ 1 '/. &· ~1 r4tfiF , . / , ~ \\. . . _._____ LL]'., Set the lens's focus mode switch to . stands for autofocus. stands for manual focus. • • Autofocus will not operate. 5 Remove the front lens cap.
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses 1 While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by the arrow. • Turn the adapter until it stops, then detach it. l 54 Detach the lens from the adapter. • Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens counterclockwise. • Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. • Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.
Using the Viewfinder Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or viewfinder. Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. • Turn the knob left or right to make the viewfinder display look sharp.
Basic Operations • Viewing the screen as you shoot As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see QJ47.
Basic Operations • Shooting through the viewfinder To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake. I (1) ( 1) (2) (2) Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly. 2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand. 3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button. 4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body. 5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other. 6.
Basic Operations The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture value. The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed on the screen or in the viewfinder for 8 sec. (metering timer/~8). Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture.
Basic Operations C~ -1 , ~ \ " ~~...... 't ~-~~ · -~ ~ f!2!; .. - ,,,.,. ~~ - - ___. . ~ ( ~-1 .,..® ~ r . (1) After pressing a button, turn the dial. Press a button such as , then turn the < 8 > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting-ready state. Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white balance, and flash exposure compensation . ' ;"~'' ~~..,,,£1 ~ :--:,- ~ .~ ~ ~ ,- tl l i1.
Basic Operations :-- (1) After pressing a button, turn the <() > dial. "'~'..:~~/' ... ;..-----"~ ::::---: ~ ¼~., ~ ~-~- ~ ...--~ ' " _j___ - - L - ~:: i - - ,., I {El r fan'\ L_ I L Press a button such as , then turn the < O > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting-ready state. Used for operations such as selecting the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white balance, and flash exposure compensation. (2) Turn only the dial.
Basic Operations - 7J-l[ _~\ ~ (1) After pr~ssing a button, turn the w8 ~'( 7~ ~JJ1 1/J II-,:_-=-- -=- - ==J JJi__ -~ - ~ - _1 <~ >dial. Press a button such as
Basic Operations < ~t~ > is an eight-direction key with center button. To use it, press lightly with the ball of your thumb. • Used for operations such as white balance correction, AF point/magnifying frame movement in still photo shooting or movie recording, magnifying frame movement during playback, or Quick Control settings. • Can also be used to select or set menu items.
Basic Operations ~ ~ :,,.,.,-- _,,_ R~)- After configuring [t: Multi function lock], you can press the button to prevent the settings from being changed by accidentally operating the Main dial, Quick control dials 1 or 2, control ring or by inadvertently tapping the touch-screen panel. Press the button again to unlock the controls.
Basic Operations Each press of the button changes the information shown. The following sample screens are for still photos.
(2) (3) - I (4) l ---- (5) (1) (7) (8)
Menu Operations and Settings (4) (1) (2) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) • ~=====:; -(11) (1_) _ Mainta_bs_ _ _ _ _ _ __ (7) C): Wireless features _ _ __ (2) Secondary tabs -----(3) Menu items (8) t: Set-up ------(4) Q: Shooting - ------- (5) (6) - AF: AF - [E: Playback (9) .~.: Custom Functions ---(10) My Menu ------(11) Menu settings ------------ *: 1 Display the
Menu Operations and Settings 3 Select an item. • Turn the < O > dial to select an item, then press <@ >. I 4 Select an option. • Turn the dial to select an option. • The current setting is indicated in blue. 5 Set an option. • Press <@ > to set it. 6 Exit the setting. • Press the
Menu Operations and Settings Example: Highlight tone priority Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it. You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing <@ >. If you cancel the overriding function's setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable. D • You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu Items.
Quick Control You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. I 2 Select an item, then select an option. • To select an item, turn the<() > dial or press < ~:~ > up or down. • To adjust the setting, turn the < ~ > or < ~ > dial, or press < ~:~ > left or right. Some items are set by pressing a button after this. • When the screen at left is displayed, press < ~:~ > vertically or horizontally for selection. • To adjust the setting, turn the< ~ >, < O >, or < ~ > dial.
Touch-Screen Operation You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touchscreen panel) with your finger. Sample screen (Quick Control) • Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen. • For example, when you tap [(Q)], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [ !::> ], you can return to the preceding screen. [J) • To have the camera beep for touch operations, set [t: Beep] to [Enable] (W186).
Shooting Mode This chapter describes shooting modes.
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) <(!1> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject (W 75). I' ( ' .., : '- ---1 1 Set the Mode dial to <(A!>. \\(!j --'---->--\.. ......_ J - 2 Aim the camera at what you will shoot {the subject). • An AF point may be displayed on the subject, under some shooting conditions.
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ; 4 Take the picture. • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. • The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen. D • &,,bject ~ COl'l'fidllY tor eonw r.111• ""'U!..-.. ~IWl9\,. . . . , . 1t111 armqmg> mer not ,u condllfoM.
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) • Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point). Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (W 58). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again. • Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously. If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can take the picture.
Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) I Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called ''focus lock".
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed manually or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure compensation. Shooting in mode, with control over each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting in , , , or mode. * < Fv > stands for Flexible value. Set the Mode dial to < Fv >. l Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and 150 speed. • Turn the < O > dial to select an item to set.
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE Combinations of functions in < Fv > mode [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] Available Similar to < P > Available Similar to < Tv > Manual selection Available Similar to [AUTO] Available Manual selection [AUTO] [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection Manual selection Manual selection Manual selection [AUTO] Manual selection Similar to < M > 77 I
P: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness. *
stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. ' 1 Set the Mode dial to
. 2 Focus on the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. • Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green (with One-Shot AF). • The shutter speed and aperture value are set automatically. 3 Check the display.
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion. * < Tv > stands for Time value. I Blurred motion (Slow speed: 1/30 sec.) Frozen motion (Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.) .
Av: Aperture-Priority AE In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number {larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
M: Manual Exposure In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure meter. * < M > stands for Manual. -~ 1 Set the Mode dial to . rr - ~ l / - \M '1 :..l. ... ~ Set the ISO speed ( CD 95). • Turn the < ~ > dial to set it. • With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation. 1 17 ':, f ':, f1 I 3 Set the shutter speed and aperture ~ value.
B: Long (Bulb) Exposures In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long exposures. --_ 1 Set the Mode dial to <8>. ,I the desired aperture value. 2 Set • Turn the dial to set it. 3 Take the picture. • The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button pressed completely.
Shooting and Recording This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on the shooting ((01) tab.
Still Photo Shooting * • A icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone , , , , , or mode.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 1 --(lJ90 --Q.)92 • Shooting 2 f-q)()ll_lil 1 J) I ;\FR 3.. 2.. 1./11..1 .. 2.'.3 - Q ISO <,p1•('cl sdt11HJ'> HDR PO sr·tt1nq.;, OFF 1\uto l 1qht1n
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 4 Lonq exp. no1c,c, rr'ducticrn H1~it1 ISO speed NR Dust Delete Data OFF ■I .
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 7 ---!PDF! --lll107 ---!PDF! :---!PDF! ~--!PDF! ---!PDF! - - - !PDF! I • Shooting 8 ---!PDF! -------- !PDF! • Shooting 9 --w111 ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! 87
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting In < (!j" > mode, the following screens are displayed.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 4 - - w 111 - - - !PDF! - - - !PDF! I 89
Image Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG, HEIF images quality options include • L, ill L, • M, ill M, • S1 , ill S1 , and S2. RAW image quality options include and CCJ..i.WJ . a 1 Select [ 101: Image quality]. • The screen displayed varies depending on the setting of [0 Rec options] in[~: Record func+card/folder sel.]. l 90 Set the image quality.
Image Quality A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as follows: fi1.i.WJ or produces RAW images with smaller file sizes than fil.i.WJ. RAW images can be processed using [[El: RAW image processing] to save them as JPEG or HEIF images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of JPEG or HEIF images with various processing conditions.
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size of approx. 35.9x23.9 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting, you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6x (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio to suit your shooting application before shooting. For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnified approx. 1.6x (APS-C size). 1 Select [O: OCropping/aspect ratio].
Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio Setting examples FULL set 4 Take the picture. • When [1.&x (crop)] is set or an EF-S lens is used, an image magnified approx. 1.6x is displayed. • When [1 :1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set, the image within the black masked is captured.
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) * By changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO speed automatically, you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three consecutive shots. • AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. 1 Select [0: Expo.comp./AEB]. the AEB range. 2 Set • Turn the < > dial to set the AEB ~ range (1). By turning the<()> dial, you can set the exposure compensation amount. • Press <@> to set it.
ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In < C!t > mode, ISO speed is set automatically. 1 Set the ISO speed. • With an image displayed on the screen, set by turning the < ~ > dial. • ISO speed can be set within ISO 100-102400 in 1/3-stop increments. e Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed automatically.
Auto Lighting Optimizer * Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too low or high. In < (1J > mode, [Standard] is set automatically. 1 Select [O: Auto Lighting Optimizer]. 2 Set a correction option.
Anti-Flicker Shooting If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result. Anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by flickering. 1 Select [IOI: Anti-flicker shoot.]. ■ 2 Select [Enable].
Shooting with Speedlites * Features of EUEX series Speedlites (sold separately) can be used in flash photography with the camera. For operation procedures, refer to the EUEX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual. • Flash exposure compensation You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an image displayed on the screen, press the button, turn the<()> dial to select the flash exposure compensation item, then turn the < B > dial to set the flash exposure compensation.
White Balance White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [B] (Ambience priority) or [Bw] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object. In<~> mode, [91 (Ambience priority) is set automatically. l I Select the white balance item. • Turn the < O > dial to select the white balance setting item.
White Balance , r ~ , "' -- -:. •i~...~~ . With [9] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [Bw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color cast. 1 Select [IOI: White balance]. 2 Select [mi3]. e With [ 9] selected, press the button. 3 Select an item.
Picture Style Selection Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In mode, [1-:~AIJ (Auto) is set automatically. 1 Select [O: Picture Style]. 2 Select a Picture Style. I • [1.:;.AJ] Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes. • (!3 ;.
Picture Style Selection • [13 :-.u] Landscape For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes. • (l.:;-.fol] Fine Detail Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject. The colors will be slightly vivid. • [13 :-NI] Neutral Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation. • [j.;:-fl] Faithful Suited for processing the image with a computer.
Clarity You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges. Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a sharper appearance. 1 Select [ 0: Clarity]. 2 Set the effect level.
Lens Aberration Correction * Vignetting , image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction]. 1 Select [ 0: Lens aberration correction]. l Select an item. 3 Select a setting. • Confirm that the name of the attached lens and (except for diffraction correction) [Correction data available) are displayed.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced. 1 l Select [ 0: Long exp. noise reduction]. Set a reduction option. I •Auto For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting is effective enough in most cases. • Enable Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction * This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced. 1 Select [0: High ISO speed NR]. l Set the level. • Low, Standard, High The camera applies an amount of noise reduction corresponding to your specified level.
Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. 1 Enable[«a] the Touch Shutter. l • Tap on the screen's bottom left. • Each time you tap the icon, it will toggle between [a] and [~]. •[~](Touch Shutter: Enable) The camera will focus on the spot you tap, then the picture will be taken. e [a] (Touch Shutter: Disable) You can tap a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
Manual Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation can be set in the , , , , and shooting modes. 1 Check the exposure. Increased exposure for a brighter image 1 12 5 F2 8 · ( ~_j, Decreased exposure for a darker image l • Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator. Set the compensation amount.
Exposure Lock (AE Lock) You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure value. Press the<*> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc. 1 Focus on the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway. • The exposure value will be displayed. Press the < * > button ( ~8 ).
Movie Recording ' I -.cc ---rz.~ 01 . For movie recording, set the Mode dial to ' <•">.
Tab Menus: Movie Recording • Shooting 1 - - lll114 - - QJ 111 --IPDFl --!PDF! • Shooting 2 I --lll94 --W95 --!PDF! --W96 --!PDF! --!PDFl --!PDF! • Shooting 3 --Ql99 --!PDF! --!PDF! --QJ101 --!PDF! --lll103 111
Tab Menus: Movie Recording • Shooting 4 - - (lJ 104 ~ - QJ 106 • Shooting 5 ---!PDF! ---!PDFI • Shooting 6 ---!PDF! '-----!PDFI 112
Tab Menus: Movie Recording • Shooting 7 ---!PDFI - - - !PDFI ---!PDF! - - - IPDF! - - - !PDFI - - - !PDFI I • Shooting 8 - - - !PDF! - - - !PDFI - --!PDFI 113
Movie Recording . . . ~ - ' . : , .. ' ,-,,~ , '~' Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene's current brightness. [f - ., I --=...~ ,, 1 Set the Mode dial to <•9'>. l\\0) ~ ·~ i . - Til) 1-7_:; 2 Select [O: Shooting mode]. 3 Select [Movie auto exposure]. c:c;J-; . 14 §y)~ - - I -- ; - - £_____ 114 Focus on the subject. • Before recording a movie, focus with AF or manual focus ( QJ 129-W 131 , QJ 142).
Movie Recording Record the movie. (1) • Press the movie shooting button to start recording a movie. You can also start recording a movie by tapping [ • ] on the screen. • While the movie is being recorded, the "eREC" mark (1) will be displayed on the upper right of the screen. • Sound is recorded with the movie microphone (2). • To stop recording the movie, press the movie shooting button again. You can also stop recording a movie by tapping ■] on the screen.
Movie Recording ~ , A'. ' , ')" ,' ?~1-;,,'".J '1'· .1 You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording. 1 Set the Mode dial to < 9'>. 11 l Select [O: Shooting mode]. 3 Select [Movie manual exp.]. ,.: · . .' ....,;.,. .. .. ;;,.......' .. ,., ..._ -, _- ~ " . . 4 Set the shutter speed, aperture ,;' value, and ISO speed. . ~ c·,JC0 •.·--~ (1) (2) •. c:3 (3) • Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.
Movie Recording Quality You can set the image size, frame rate, and compression method in the [Movie rec. size] menu of (0: Movie rec quality]. The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending on the [ t-: Video system] setting. 1J • ;1!1if ,. ..... ..... -...a1lllltll 1111 . I • [tiK] 3840x2160 The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. • [ §f"Ho] 1920x 1080 The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality.
Movie Recording Quality • Recording 4K movies requires a stable card with a fast writing speed. • Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may cause the camera's internal temperature to increase faster or become higher than for regular movies. If [g]] or a red [(OJ] icon appears during movie recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not remove the card immediately.
Movie Recording Quality The movie image area varies depending on factors such as movie recording size, cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.
Movie Recording Quality • Frame rate {fps: frame per second) • [ml] 119.9 fps/[m!§] 59.94 fps/[IDI] 29.97 fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For [Im], see Ill 121. • (IDID] 100.0 fps/[1111 50.00 fps/[IIII] 25.00 fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). For [Ill], see QJ 121. • [Bl] 23.98 fps Mainly for motion pictures. Ill (23.98 fps) is available when[~: Video system] is set to [For NTSC].
Movie Recording Quality You can record Full HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or 100.0 fps. This is ideal for recording movies that will be played back in slow motion. The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. • • • • .a Movies are recorded in ~D . . []fil or ~D []f[I quality. Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies. Time code display during movie recording advances 4 sec. per second. Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.
---- --------~-------- 122 -----
AF/Drive This chapter describes autofocus operation and drive modes and introduces menu settings on the AF ([AF]) tab. * • A icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in , , , , , or mode. . - ~· ;ri: , . ' . - < -~ ; -~ -· • • ; "' \~., - • - . . - - _!:.' _ Jt......: _ ..
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photo Shooting) • AF1 AF /\F 01w1 c1t1on ONE SHOT AF - - lll 129 /\F method AFU :....___ lll 131 Suliwct to detect Pl'Of)ll' - - !PDFI DisablP Enable - - QJ 136 - - (ll 140 - - a:) 141 Continuous /\F r,1nvie Sc•rvo AF =----!PDFI Touch & drag AF settings • AF2 AF t,1F peaki11CJ '>dtir1~1s Ftlrns ciuicle Off /\F c1s1.,1st bec1in t,rin(J [j) • When RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is displayed on the [AF2] tab.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photo Shooting) •AF3 !PDF! !PDF! !PDF! !PDF! !PDF! •AF4 • I' ,! I " ·, ,·.f I . .I I ... 1 rrt : I, () 'J !' '' ! (Ii ' i _': I• 1 .·.F ''' I . I· I I ® If '. I ◄ 1I• I I .
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photo Shooting) In <(!j> mode, the following screens are displayed. •AF1 ---!PDF! --CJ:1136 --QJ140 --QJ141 ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDFI •AF2 AF ---!PDFI FrH_uc; 1111t1 rot it1011 RF IP!!', rJF fr;<_U', llflll '-,('11Sit1v1ty {'.· -,er1',it1v1tv- i\F pt sr·lt•Ct 126 _,,....
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording) •AF1 --(ll131 ---!PDF! --W136 --QJ141 ---!PDF! •AF2 ---!PDF! ---!PDF! I •AF3 ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDF! 127
Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording) • AF4 AF Focus ri11u f(}\c1tion RF lens r\.11F focu'.:> ring senc,itiv1ty -:'.: '-Pns1t1v1ty- ,'\F pt select 128 ~-. ---IPDFI :.~.
AF Operation You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. 1 Set the lens's focus mode switch to . l Select [AF: AF operation]. I 3 Select an item.
AF Operation Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. • When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. • The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture. • For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see "Selecting the Drive Mode" (W 143). This AF operation is suited for moving subjects.
Selecting the AF Method ~ :: : ~ +Tracking The camera detects and focuses on faces of people or animals. [ : :] (an AF point) appears over any face detected, which is then tracked. HNFOQ If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF. With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF. As long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting, focusing will continue. WWI @]: Spot AF The camera focuses in a narrower area than 1-point AF.
Selecting the AF Method [xpanrl AF rtft'd "'j' ,- -·-- Exp,rnrJ AF drt'd Aroum1 r••h¥ii 132 - r 7 L -' -~·: Expand AF area: -~· Focuses using one AF point [ □] and surrounding AF points. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-pointAF. Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Zone AF. When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [ □].
Selecting the AF Method --.,..,.. • r - l 1' ,--- ~- :t· .'' ,, ;, ....... r • --• ,11 __J : : Large Zone AF: Vertical Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and also effective for moving subjects.
Selecting the AF Method You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. If you prefer to focus manually, see (ll 142. 1 Select [AF: AF method]. 2 Select the AF method.
Selecting the AF Method • ~(face)+Tracking: ~:: * The camera detects and focuses on faces of people or animals. If a face moves, the AF point[: :1also moves to track the face. You can set [AF: Eye detection] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject's eyes in focus (lll 136). 1 Check the AF point. :1 • An AF point[: appears over any face detected. • To choose a face to focus on when multiple faces can be detected, press the button to change the AF point to [()]and use<~¼~>.
Selecting the AF Method With the AF method set to [~+Tracking), you can shoot with the eyes of people or animals in focus. 1 Select [ AF : Eye detection]. 2 Select [Enable]. 3 Aim the camera at the subject. 4 136 • An AF point is displayed around their eye. • To choose a face to focus on, press the button to change the AF point to [ ( ) ] and use < ~¼~ >. As you use < ~¼~ >, the AF point changes again to [ ◄: :►]. • You can also tap the screen to choose an eye.
Selecting the AF Method • Spot AF / 1-point AF / Expand AF area: -~- / Expand AF area: Around / Zone AF / Large Zone AF: Vertical / Large Zone AF: Horizontal* You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF screens are used as an example. 1 Check the AF point. (1) • The AF point ( 1) will appear. • With Expand AF area: -~- or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed.
Selecting the AF Method Focus and take the picture. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. • When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. • If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.
Selecting the AF Method • Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. • Image brightness may change during autofocusing. • Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease. • If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
Continuous AF This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway. 1 Select [AF: Continuous AF]. l 140 Select [Enable].
Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie recording. 1 Select [AF: Movie Servo AF]. l Select [Enable]. I • Enable • The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway. • To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by touching [;;:AFJ in the lower left of the screen.
Manual Focus If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and focus manually. 1 Set the lens's focus mode switch to . • Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. •l Magnify the image. • Each press of the < ~ > button changes the magnification ratio, as follows. x5---+ x10 -. x1 ••3 Move the magnified area. • Use < ~¼~ > to move the magnified area into position for focusing.
Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. ~~ ~ ~ ~;::: ~ ; • ; "' "y ~ . ,.. ~ ; ~~-- \ ........ .f. r . ~; ; ·1.-..J ~ \. .• ,,.. ,,.. 1 Press the button ( ~6). • With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. ;; 2 Select the drive mode item. • Turn the < O > dial to select the drive mode item. I 3 Select the drive mode. • Turn the< ~ > dial to make a selection.
Selecting the Drive Mode • [~] Low-speed continuous shooting When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down. • [I®] Self-timer: 1O sec./remote control • [; ® 2 ] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control For details on self-timer shooting, see QJ 145. D • Approx. 12 shots/sec. continuous shooting speed with [QI.!] is available under the following conditions. • Room Temperature (23°C/73°F) • Battery level (LP.
Using the Self-Timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. 1 Press the < M-Fn > button ( ~6 ). • With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. 2 Select the drive mode item. • Turn the < O > dial to select the drive mode item. 3 Select the self-timer. • Turn the < B > dial to select the selftimer. ;~: Shoot In 10 sec. ; ~ 2 : Shoot In 2 sec. 4 Take the picture.. 1/ _ -~ _ t~ ~~-\ ...... ;::,, " :=:o:::-\ ea...l ~ .....
146
Playback This chapter covers topics related to playback-playing back captured still photos and movies-and introduces menu settings on the playback ([[El) tab.
Tab Menus: Playback • Playback 1 ,---- !PDF! ;---- Ill 157 - - IPDFI - - !PDF! - - !PDF! - - !PDF! • Playback 2 - - !PDF! - - !PDF! • Playback 3 '---- IPDF! '----IPDF! - - jPDF! - - !PDF! D • [IE: RAW Image processing] and [IE: HEIF-+JPEG conversion] are not displayed in mode.
Tab Menus: Playback • Playback 4 --!PDFI ---!PDFI ---IPDFI -----!PDFI ----- !PDFI -----!PDFI • Playback 5 ---!PDFI ---!PDFI ---!PDF! ---!PDF! ---!PDFI ---!PDF! I 149
Image Playback 1 Switch to playback. • Press the <[E]> button. • The last image captured or played back is displayed. ~ -r ~-.: l \ I I J IE ni r L Browse images. • To play back images starting with the last image captured, turn the < O > dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise. • Each time you press the button, the display will change. Shooting information display 3 Exit image playback.
Image Playback With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press < ~f~ > up or down to view other information. You can also customize the information displayed, in [[E: Playback information display].
Image Playback The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First, press the < [E > button to prepare for touch playback. Browse images Jump display Index display Magnified view [j] • 152 You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
Switch to the index display. .. ,._,., _. -· j .. ·: -~ .. • During image playback, turn the < ~ > dial counterclockwise. • The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame. • Turning the < ~ > dial further counterclockwise will switch the display from 9 images, 36 images, and to 100 images. If you turn the dial clockwise, it will rotate through 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image display. ', I ' - .. 2 Browse images.
Switch to playback. • Press the < [E > button. 2 Select a movie. • Use the < O > dial to select a movie to play. e In the single-image display, the [Di !2!] icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie. • In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie. Movies cannot be played back from index display, so press <@> to switch to single-image display. 3 In the single-image display, press <@>. 4 Press<@> to play back the movie. • The movie will start playing back.
Movie Playback • Turn the < a > dial to adjust the volume (even during playback).
Movie Playback Movie playback panel ► Playback I► Slow motion M Skip backward ◄ II Previous frame 11 ► Next frame M Skip forward ~ Edit ¢:I Frame Grab Pressing <@ > toggles between playback and stop. Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the < O > dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen. Skips backward 4 sec. each time you press <@ >. Displays the previous frame each time you press <@ >. Holding <@ > down will rewind the movie.
Erasing Images You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected im~ges will not be erased. -ac&:-• -•• ~ •••.,.,.,no To....,.... ,••'.•M►•111111111•1t. -••11111• ........... llllporfant ....... 1 Press the < [E > button. l Select the image to be erased.' O • Turn the < to erase. ~ > dial to select the image 3 Press the button. I 4 Erase the images. JPEG/HEif/RAW images or movies • Select [Erase]. RAW+JPEG/RAW+HEIF images • Select an item.
-------- -- ------ 158
Wireless Features This chapter describes how to send images from the camera to a smartphone wirelessly using Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi®features. D 1mpor1an1 • Note that canon caru,ot be held C8Ul8d by erroneous wbll88 mmm. wlnCI the camlira. 1n addlllon, canon caMOt tor any other lol8 or damage cau1 ad by uee-of t. tamefa.
Tab Menus: Wireless Features • Wireless features 1 VVi Fl Blul'tontt1 COllf1('(_ t1m1 /\irpl,1111_· 111ocle Off '>l'ltlll(j'> Di'>able Bluetootll <;!'ttiriqc; Disdl)I() VV1-F1 Nic~nc1111P C1PS drviu: c;r•tt1rigs I maqe trarv; fer • Wireless features 2 160 --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --lPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection 1 Select [ (): Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 2 Select an item for the camera to connect to. □ Connect to smartphone Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as "smartphones" in this manual).
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection ~~ Connect to Wireless Remote This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
Connecting to a Smartphone You can do the following after pairing the camera with a Bluetooth enabled smartphone. • Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone. • Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off. • Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone. • Control the camera remotely from a smartphone. You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi. • Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone.
Connecting to a Smartphone . . •.. " ' :1 ; J~.. The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed. • Use the latest version of the smartphone OS. • Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
Connecting to a Smartphone Steps on the camera (1) 1 Select [C): Wi-Fi settings]. l Select [Enable]. 3 Select [C): Bluetooth settings]. I 4 Select [Enable].
Connecting to a Smartphone S Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 6 Select [ □: Connect to smartphone]. 7 Select [Add a device to connect to]. 8 Select an item. • If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. • If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App Store and install Camera Connect.
Connecting to a Smartphone 9 Select [Pair via Bluetooth]. •Press<@> to start pairing. • To pair with a different smartphone after pairing with one initially, select [OK] on the screen at left.
Connecting to a Smartphone Steps on the smartphone (1) 1Q start Camera Connect. t the camera for pairing. 11 Tap • If you are using an Android smartphone, Detect camera Choose • camera for pairing. go to step 13. 12 Tap [Pair] (iOS only).
Connecting to a Smartphone Steps on the camera (2) 13 Select [OK]. 14 Press<@>. • Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth. • A Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen. L I ~ ~:::-: (~ •--• - ' a;;: ..,;.,•/'-::' ~~---;-~ ---,.- c" ~-~{ki;Ji.;.:~~~~•-• ., . :, ~•":r,i~,~:.~{~~--~ 1 - ..-· --; .-., :iN;,~<;f '.:.\\~ ::,~ .r;-, =··;. '·,,..,•'.:,,; ,,- • - ·,_; -~•;r .• •. - -,.-.,1.,J ~ >; ·:~ /~~:~:·:· ·•.~•-...i,":i. ~- hx' .
Connecting to a Smartphone Steps on the smartphone (2) 15 Tap a Camera Connect function. • In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. • For the Camera Connect functions, see lI) 171. • When a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected function will appear. • [ □ Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera. • The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on the main Camera Connect screen. The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now complete.
Connecting to a Smartphone Images on camera • Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated . • Images can be saved on a smartphone. Remote live view shooting • Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone. Auto transfer • Enables camera and app setting adjustment for automatic transfer of your shots. Bluetooth remote controller • Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via Bluetooth. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.
Connecting to a Smartphone . ~ ~ -:. ~ .... ·~- ~ \ .; . ·- , \ •• : • • • 4 ,- ~ ... _ "°'"\~ . . . :."• ~ , w :· :~~• ~' . '_., ~ •,. ' • ' " '· Steps on the camera (1) to [Enable]. 1 Set Wi-Fi settings 1-2 l • See steps in "Connecting to a Bluetooth-Compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi" ( Ill 165). Select [C>: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. 3 Select[ □ Connect to smartphone]. • If the history is displayed, switch screens with the < O > <~ > dial or <~f~>.
Connecting to a Smartphone 6 Select [Connect via Wi-Fi]. (1> 7 Check the SSID {network name) and password. • Check the SSID (1) and Password (2) displayed on the camera screen.
Connecting to a Smartphone Steps on the smartphone ._CanonOA a ~® 8 Operate the smartphone to establish a Wi-Fi connection. Smartphone's screen {sample) • Activate Wi-Fi on the smartphone, then tap the SSID (network name) checked in step 7 of "Steps on the camera (1 )." • For the password, enter the password checked in step 7 of "Steps on the camera (1 )." -;:- Detect camera 9 Start Camera Connect and tap the camera to connect to via Wi-Fi. Steps on the camera (2) 1Q Select [OK].
Connecting to a Smartphone Perform either of the following operations. On the Camera Connect screen, tap [0). On the [ □ Wi-Fi on] screen, select [Disconnect,exit]. • If the ( □ Wi-Fi on] screen is not displayed, select ( (): Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection]. • Select [Disconnect,exit], then select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
-------- -------------- ~---- ------- ------------- --------------------- 176
Set-up This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([t]) tab. * • A icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in , , , , , or mode.
Tab Menus: Set-up • Set-up 1 Record fun< •Ct1rcl folrli·r sel. --!PDF! File nurnher1nq --!PDF! Continuous File name --IPDFI Format ecird ~ - (IJ 181 Auto rotate 0nO L_~ --lPDFI Add •~ rntc1te info Disable '---!PDFI Date/Tirne:Zone 03110/20 13:30 - - Q:1 182 • Set-up 2 2 La11c_1L1,--ic1e -:·.
Tab Menus: Set-up • Set-up 4 --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDFI - - QJ 191 • Set-up 5 --lJJ192 --!PDF! --!PDFI --!PDF! --!PDFI --!PDF! --!PDF! IJ e (Custom ehootlnl mode (C1-c3)J Is not dlaplayecl for movie recording.
Tab Menus: Set-up In < ru > mode, the following screen is displayed for[~ 5].
Formatting If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. 1 Select [t: Format card]. 2 Select a card. • [[!)] represents card 1, and [@], card 2. • Select the card. 3 Format the card. e Select [OK]. I • For low-level formatting, press the <1iiJ> button to add a checkmark < ../ > to [Low level format], then select [OK].
Date/Time/Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first. By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it. Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be sure to set your date/time. 1 Select [t: Date/Time/Zone]. 2 Set the time zone. • Turn the < O > dial to select [Time zone].
Datemme/Zone • Turn the < O > dial to select a [Time difference] item(+ -/hour/minute), then press< @) >. • Set by turning the<()> dial, then press < @) >. • After entering the time zone or time difference, turn the < O > dial to select [OK], then press< @) >. 3 Set the date and time. • Tum the < O > dial to select an item, then press < @) >. • Set by turning the<()> dial, then press < @) >. 4 Set the daylight saving time. • Set it as necessary. • Turn the< () > dial to select [ ·:t'1, then press< @) >.
Language 1 Select [t: Language w ]. l 184 Set the desired language.
Help Features When Hmm Help] is displayed, you can display a description about the feature by pressing the button. Press it again to exit Help display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, turn the< ()> dial. • Example: [AF: Case 2] .. (1) • Example: [": Multi function lock] ..
Beeping 1 Select [~: Beep]. 2 Select an item. • Enable The camera beeps after focusing and in response to touch operations. • Touch~ Disables beeping for touch operations. • Disable Disables beeping for focus confirmation , self-timer shooting, and touch operations.
Power Saving You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder turn off automatically after the camera is left idle (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off). 1 Select[~: Power saving]. l Select an item.
Eco Mode Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Select[": Eco mode]. 2 Select [On]. • The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approx. two seconds. Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. • To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off, press the shutter button halfway.
Screen Brightness 1 Select [~: Screen brightness). 2 Make the adjustment. • Referring to the gray image, turn the < O > dial to adjust brightness, then press <@>. Check the effect on the screen.
Viewfinder Brightness 1 Select [t: Viewfinder brightness]. 2 Make the adjustment. • Referring to the gray image, turn the <()> dial to adjust brightness, then press <@) >. Check the effect in the viewfinder.
Sensor Cleaning The camera's sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor. 1 Select [ ~ : Sensor cleaning]. l Select [Clean now ++-D ]. • Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
Resetting Camera The camera's settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be reverted to their defaults. 1 Select[": Reset camera]. 2 Select an item. • Basic settings Restores default settings for camera shooting functions and menu settings. • Other settings Settings for individual selected items can be reset. 3 Clear the settings. • Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
Custom Functions/ My Menu You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. You can also add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently to My Menu tabs.
Tab Menus: Customization • Custom 1 0 ',,. Exposu r·e level rnc rPrnents 1/3 ISO spepcJ settincJ increments 1/3 Spec-d from rnctering/1S0 Auto Br,1< kctinq auto 4~TOON CillKrl Bracketrnq sequence 0- Numlwr of hracketect shots 3 Safety shift OFF --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --!PDFI ~--!PDF! • Custom 2 I() ,,, . 2 St111w c-:,:p() for 11e':.1 c11w•tu11• OFF /,E lock 111etcr 1nocll· after f ()CLJS Set sl1uttc•r c;peccJ r.
Tab Menus: Customization • Custom 4 - - - !PDF! - - - !PDF! - - - !PDF! - - - IPDFl - - - IPDFl - - - !PDF! • Custom 5 • Selecting [.9..: Clear all Custom Fune. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings.
Tab Menus: My Menu --!PDFI --!PDFI --!PDFI IPDFI 196
Reference
Trademarks • Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Google Play and Android are trademarks of Google LLC. • IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. • QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery).
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others) • The model number is DS 126832 (including wireless module model WM601). • Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use - Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to check where use is allowed.
USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. FCC/ISED(IC) Notice Model: DS126832 (including wireless module model WM601) This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference.
FCC Notice (This Product, Model DS126832 systems) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Complies with IMDA Standards OB00671 Some logos for technical standards the camera has met can be viewed on the screen by choosing MENU ► (t] tab ► [Certification Logo Display].
----------------- --- -~ - 204
Index Numbers B (Bulb): 82 1-point AF : 137 Beep (Beeper) : 186 [4K] 3840x2160 (Movie) : 117_ _ __ BKT AEB : 94 A Bluetooth function Access lamp : 46 Connecting : 165 AEB : 94 ---------AE lock: 109 -----------· ~ulb exposu~e : 82 BUSY : 91 AF AF method : 131 C AF operation : 129 Camera Default settings : 192 AF point selection : 134 Holding the camera : 56 ~eep (Beeper) : 186 Continuous AF : 140 Camera shake : 58, 74 _ _ Eye detection : 136 Cards : 10, 26, 44 _ Manual focusing : 142
Index Digital terminal : 29 H Dioptric adjustment : 55 Help : 185 Display off : 187 High Frame Rate : 1_21_ _ Double-tap : 152 High ISO speed noise reduction : 106 Dragging : 70 High-speed continuous shooting : 143 Drive mode : 143 Hot shoe: 28 - - - - - - - ---- - _ - ------ E Eco mode : 188 Icons: 8 Erasing_Qmages) : 157 Image quality : 90 Expanded ISO speed : 95 Images Exposure compensation : 94 Erasing : 157 Exposure level indicator : 81 Index disp_ la~y_:_1_5_ 3 _ _ _ _ _ __
Index L~ng Exposure ~e>ise Reduction : _1_05___ Multi function : 62 Low-speed continuous shooting : 144 Multi-function lock : 63 _ M ---------- - Magnifying images : 142 _ _ _ _ __ N Main dial : 59 Noise reduction Man~ al exposure : 81 _ High l~O speed : 1_0~ 6 _ _ _ __ Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 106 Long expos~ res _ :1 _0_5_ _ _ _ __ Manual focusing__'._~ 42 NTSC : 120 Maximum burst : 91 Memory ~rds ~ G_ard:....
Index ----- Quick Control : 69 Single shooting : 143 Quick control dial : 60, 61 Software : 35 - -- -- -- - ·--- User manual : 37 _ _ _ _ _ __ R Speaker:30 RAW: 90, 91 -- ---- §pot AF: 1]7 RAW+JPEG: 90~- - - - - - - - Strap:3~4:___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Reduced display : 153 - - - - - R_em_o_te_ con_t_ r o_l te::::..:r~m..:..::in:. :.: a:.:. I. .::. . =-29 -=--------- T !_ im_e _z_on_e : 182=--- - - - - - - - S Touch beeping : 1_ 8 6_ _ _ _ _ _ __ Safety instructions_:.
Index Camera Connect: 164, 171 iOS: 164 Wireless communication : 159 z Zone AF: 137 I 209
cauou
Canon CT2-B129-B © CANON INC.
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Store, share, play and print at this Canon online photo site. WIRELESS HELP Learn How to Set Up Your Wi-Fi• Connection! USA Find easy step by step 1nstruct1ons for your camera at usa.canon.com/WirelessHelp Learn How to Set Up Your Wi-Fi• Connection! Find easy step by step instructions for your camera at Canada canon.ca/wireless Apprenez aConfigurer Votre Connexion Wi-Fi•! Trouverdes instructions point par point qui sonl faoles pour votre appareil photo II canon.
Register Your Canon Imaging Product Now Visit www.canon.ca/register ENJOY THE BENEFITS OF REGISTERING Register Your Canon Imaging Product Now Visit www.registercanon.com • Receive automatic notification of the most up to date driver, firmware and software upgrades. • Receive the latest product and promotion information from Canon Canada Inc. • As a valued customer. you will receive important information relating specifically to your product.
Ca11011 CANON LIMITED WARRANTY/ GARANTIE LIMITEE CANON Canon Imaging Products Warranty CANON U.S.A., INC. CANON CANADA INC. CANON Imaging Products and Accessories Limited Warranty - For U.S.A. & Canada Only The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. (Canon U.S.A.) in the United States or Canon Canada Inc.
Canon Canada You may obtain technical support for your Products as follows: • Internet support for English at www.canon.ca/english/cs (E-mail support also available) • Internet support for French at www.canon.ca/francais/cs (E-mail support also available} • Telephone assistance from a Canon Canada Customer Care representative free of charge during regular business hours at 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666).
Instructions ENG
Thank you for purchasing a Canon product. Canon’s RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM is a standard zoom lens for use with EOS R series cameras. zz“IS” stands for Image Stabilizer. zz“USM” stands for Ultrasonic Motor. Camera Firmware Please use the latest version of firmware with the camera in use. For details on whether the firmware is the latest version or not, and for details on updating the firmware, please check the Canon website.
Safety Precautions Precautions to ensure that the camera is used safely. Read these precautions thoroughly. Make sure all details are observed in order to prevent risks and injury to the user and other people. Warning Caution Details pertaining to risks that may result in damage to property. zz Do not leave the product in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the product to malfunction. Details pertaining to risks that may result in death or serious injury.
General Precautions Handling Precautions zz If the lens is taken from a cold environment into a warm one, condensation may develop on the lens surface and internal parts. To prevent condensation in this case, first put the lens into an airtight plastic bag before taking it from a cold to warm environment. Then take out the lens after it has warmed gradually. Do the same when taking the lens from a warm environment into a cold one.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the instructions. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Nomenclature Zoom ring (→ 7) Focus mode switch (→ 7) Zoom position index (→ 7) Hood mount (→ 12) Zoom ring lock lever (→ 8) Rubber ring (→ 6) Filter mounting thread (→ 13) Control ring (→ 9) Focusing ring (→ 7) Image stabilizer switch (→ 10) Lens mount index (→ 6) Contacts (→ 6) Lens mount (→ 6) zz For detailed information, reference page numbers are provided in parentheses (→ **).
1. Attaching and Detaching the Lens Lens mount index Lens release button Dust cap Attaching the Lens Align the lens mount indexes of the lens and camera, and turn the lens clockwise until you hear a click. Detaching the Lens Turn the lens counterclockwise while pressing the camera’s lens release button. Detach the lens once it has stopped turning. Please refer to the camera's instructions for details. zzSet the camera’s power switch to OFF when attaching or detaching the lens.
2. Setting the Focus Mode 3. Zooming Focus mode switch To zoom, turn the lens’ zoom ring. Focusing ring To shoot in autofocus (AF) mode, set the focus mode switch to AF. To use only manual focusing (MF), set the focus mode switch to MF, and focus by turning the focusing ring. zzBe sure to finish zooming before focusing. Zooming after focusing can affect the focus. zzBlurring may temporarily occur if the zoom ring is quickly turned. zzQuickly turning the focusing ring may result in delayed focus.
4. Fixing the Zoom Ring The zoom ring can be fixed to keep the lens at the shortest point. This function is convenient for carrying a camera on a strap because it prevents the lens from extending. 1 Turn the zoom ring to the widest position (24 mm). 2 Slide the zoom ring lock lever in the direction indicated by the arrow. zzTo release the zoom ring, slide the zoom ring lock lever in the direction opposite to the arrow.
5. Control Ring The control ring can be assigned the functions that are commonly used with cameras, such as shutter speed and aperture settings. Control ring The click action of the control ring allows you to have a sense of how much it is being turned. Please refer to the camera's instructions for details on how to use the control ring. zzThere are cases in which the sound of control ring operations may be recorded when shooting movies.
6. Image Stabilizer This function provides image stabilization appropriate for shooting conditions (such as shooting still subjects and panning shots). Set the image stabilizer switch to ON when you want to use the Image Stabilizer. zz Set the image stabilizer switch to OFF when you are not going to use the Image Stabilizer. zzThe Image Stabilizer cannot compensate for a blurred shot caused by a subject that moved.
Image Stabilizer The Image Stabilizer for this lens is suited to hand-held shots in the following conditions. zz In semi-darkened areas such as indoors or outdoors at night. zz In locations where a flash cannot be used, such as art museums and theater stages. zz In situations where your footing is uncertain. zz In situations where fast shutter speed settings cannot be used. zz Panning shots of vehicles, trains, etc.
7. Hood The custom lens hood cuts out unwanted light and protects the front of the lens from rain, snow, and dust. Attachment position mark Red dot Button Red dot Attachment position mark Red dot Stop position mark ● Attaching the Hood Align the red attachment position mark on the hood with the red dot on the front of the lens, and then turn the hood in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click.
8. Filters (Sold separately) You can attach filters to the filter mounting thread on the front of the lens. zzOnly one filter may be attached. zzIf you need a polarizing filter, use the Canon Circular Polarizing Filter PL-C B. zzDetach the hood when adjusting the polarizing filter. 9. Close-up Lenses (Sold separately) Attaching a 500D Close-up Lens enables closeup photography. It provides a magnification of 0.05x to 0.39x. zzClose-up Lens 250D cannot be attached because there is no size that fits the lens.
Specifications Focal Length/Aperture Lens Construction Minimum Aperture Angle of View Min. Focusing Distance Max. Magnification 24-105mm f/4 14 groups, 18 elements f/22 Horizontal: 74°- 19° 20′, Vertical: 53°- 13°, Diagonal: 84°- 23° 20′ 0.45 m/1.48 ft. 0.24x (at 105 mm) Approx. 539 x 353 - 143 x 96 mm/ Field of View 21.22 x 13.90 – 5.63 x 3.78 in. (at 0.45 m/1.48 ft.) Filter Diameter 77 mm Max. Diameter and Length 83.5 x 107.3 mm/3.29 x 4.22 in. Weight Approx. 700 g/24.69 oz.
CT1-D037-A 0718Ni © CANON INC.
